JP6653008B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention executes a variable display game in which identification information is changed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting port, and when a result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game advantageous to a player. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a state .

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a variable display game is executed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting port, and when the variable display game has a special result, a special game advantageous to a player is performed. What can generate a state is common.

  In such a gaming machine, the first starting memory is stored based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the second starting memory is stored based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port. There is also known a game in which the start-up memory and the second start-up memory are digested in the storage order to execute the variable display game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-176320 A

By the way, it is desirable that the start memory display of the gaming machine be more entertaining.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to enhance the interest in the start memory display.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, a variable display game that changes identification information is executed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting port, and when a result of the variable display game is a special result, a game In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player, an effect control means capable of controlling an effect of the gaming machine, and an execution right of the variable display game based on a winning of a game ball to the starting port. Start-up storage means capable of storing a start-up memory, wherein the start-up port includes a first start-up port and a second start-up port; A first start memory for executing the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball is stored, and a second start for executing the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is stored. storing memory, the performance control unit, before E Bei the start memory display means capable of displaying a start memory as the start memory display, the start memory display means, based on the variable display game results, the predetermined display position of the starting memory display from a predetermined display position der can be different particular display position and the display position is, the with said at predetermined display position to display the first start memory, wherein the specific display position for displaying the second start memory The first startup memory is not displayed .

According to a representative embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to enhance interest in the start storage display .

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side. It is a front view of the game board of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control system of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a first half of main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a latter half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a random number bit transposition pattern according to the first embodiment of this invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial value random number update process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment of this invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an input process according to the first embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of switch reading processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an output process according to the first embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fraud & winning monitoring processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning number counter update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a command setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game state check processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the payout busy signal check processing of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure suspension information determination processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big winning opening switch monitoring processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of design change control processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special figure usual processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process shift setting process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 change start processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit determination processing of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation pattern setting processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a 2-byte distribution process according to the first embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 change start processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure changing process shift setting process (special figure 2) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure change processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process during special figure display of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during special figure display of 1st Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production mode information check processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time reduction change frequency update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (at the time of the end of time saving) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the upper winning a prize mouth opening and closing pattern of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the lower big winning opening opening and closing pattern of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process in a fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process in a fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the solenoid information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing change setting processing 1 during the opening of the special winning opening according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing change setting processing 2 during the opening of a special winning opening according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing during opening of a special winning opening according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing setting setting process 3 during the opening of the special winning opening according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big winning opening residual ball processing of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit end processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit end processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting processing 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the general map game processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the gate switch monitoring processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the supermarket winning switch monitoring processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the usual figure usual processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ordinary figure normal process shift setting process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process during normal figure fluctuation | variation of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal figure fluctuation | variation of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process during normal-drawing display according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal-drawing display of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process change setting process in the per-figure process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a normal drawing hit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the electric power operation shift setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal electric remaining sphere processing of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the per-figure end process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ordinary figure normal process shift setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED edit processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the radio wave fraud monitoring processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the external information edit processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the main prize ball signal edit processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the opening signal edit processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a timer interrupt process according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number circuit monitoring process of the modification 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing of the modification 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED edit processing of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the main processing (sub side) of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the reception command check processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variable system command processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation effect setting processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the notice lottery processing during the first half change of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the notice lottery processing during the latter half change of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a prefetch command processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a normal system hold icon according to the first embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the special system reservation icon of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a hold display unit case, (A) is a figure in which a hold display unit is in an initial position, (B) is a figure in which a hold display unit is in a production position, and (C) is a fourth hold display unit opened. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 hold | maintenance notice setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the suspension change notice decision table of a 1st embodiment of the present invention, and (A) is a figure explaining suspension change notice decision table 1 and (B). It is a figure explaining a suspension change timing decision table of a 1st embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a suspension change timing determination table 1, (B) is a suspension change timing determination table 2, (C) is a suspension change FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a timing determination table 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 hold | maintenance display process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half of the mechanical suspension notice execution processing of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half of a mechanical suspension notice execution process of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the reserved storage area of the 1st embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a figure explaining the structure of special figure 1 reserved storage area, (B) is a figure of special figure 2 reserved storage area FIG. 2C is a diagram illustrating the structure, and FIG. 2C is a diagram illustrating the structure of the digestion pending storage area and the standby pending storage areas 1 to 4 of FIG. It is a figure explaining the notice suggestion character of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram explaining operation | movement of a hold | maintenance display unit when this production of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed, and the early display of a screen lower part. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram illustrating the operation of the hold display unit and the display of the middle part 1 at the bottom of the screen when the main effect according to the first embodiment of the present invention is executed. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram illustrating the operation of the hold display unit and the display of the middle part 2 at the bottom of the screen when the main effect according to the first embodiment of the present invention is executed. It is a transition diagram explaining operation | movement of a hold | maintenance display unit at the time of this production of 1st Embodiment of this invention being performed, and display of the end stage of a screen lower part. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a hold | maintenance display unit and display of the lower part of a screen when a gassing effect is performed by raising / lowering operation | movement of a hold | maintenance display unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a hold | maintenance display unit and display of the lower part of a screen when a gassing effect is performed by the notice suggestion character of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a reservation display unit case where a reservation display unit of modification 3 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention is in an initial position. It is sectional drawing of the hold | maintenance display unit case and the display of the modification 3 of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of a display and a hold display unit of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a hold display unit of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 reservation advance notice setting processing of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the notice character decision table of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the notice character of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 suspension display processing of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining operation of a hold display unit of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view in the center case of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the emission color of a reservation display part and a reservation icon of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view in a center case in a non-electric support state of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view in a center case at the time of electric support shift of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 reservation advance notice setting processing of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the suspension change notice decision table of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention, and (A) is a figure explaining suspension change notice decision table 1 and (B). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hold | maintenance display process of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the accessory operation processing of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect light emission part lighting processing of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the reserved storage area of special figure 1 and special figure 2 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram explaining the operation of the first half of the movable effect member and the hold display part in the electric support according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition figure explaining the operation of the second half of the movable effect member and the hold display part in the electric support of the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the lighting operation of the reservation display part of the modification 1 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 15 is a front view of a hold display unit in a state where a hold display unit according to a second modification of the third embodiment of the present invention has not failed. FIG. 18 is a front view of a hold display unit in a state where a second hold display unit according to a second modification of the third embodiment of the present invention has failed. It is a front view of the game board of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a starting winning opening unit of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining an example of a combination of the 1st game state and the 2nd game state of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view in the center case in the 1st game state of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view in the center case in the 2nd game state of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead command processing of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining a reservation icon of a 4th embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a figure explaining a normal system reservation icon, and (B) is a figure explaining a special system reservation icon. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of reservation notice setting processing of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the suspension change notice decision table of a 4th embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a suspension change notice decision table 1, (B) is a suspension change notice decision table 2, (C) is a suspension change It is a figure explaining the notice decision table 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hold | maintenance display process of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition figure centering on a stand-by hold display area for explaining transition of a hold display of a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production part operation processing of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining an early transition of a production part, a movable production member, a screen, etc. of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the transition of the middle stage of the production part, the movable production member, the screen, etc. of the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining transition of the end stage of a production part, a movable production member, a screen, etc. of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining a display screen in the 2nd game state of modification 1 of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged view of the standby hold display area and the digestion hold display area in the first game state of the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of a screen etc. explaining operation of a production part and a movable production member in the 2nd game state of modification 2 of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the screen etc. which explain the operation of the display unit and the movable effect member when the pseudo-run variation of the third modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention occurs. It is a transition diagram of the screen etc. which explain the operation of the display unit and the movable effect member when the pseudo-run variation of the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention occurs. It is a figure explaining the notice suggestion character of modification 5 of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 25 is a screen transition diagram for explaining a change of a hold icon by a notice suggestion character according to a fifth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of a hold change production process of a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view in the center case of a 5th embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a figure explaining the state where the passage gate is not effective, and (B) is a figure explaining the state where the passage gate was effective. It is a front view in the center case of a 5th embodiment of the present invention, (C) is a figure explaining a state where a game ball passed a passing gate of an effective state, and (D) shows a state where a holding icon changed. It is.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction as viewed from the player playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a main body frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The opening / closing frame includes a front frame 12 and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front face of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 can be viewed.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. In addition, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) disposed on the back side of the game board 30 and the like. Can be.

  Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light in accordance with a game state are provided at the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorating devices 18a and 18b each contain an illumination member such as an LED therein, and emit light according to a game state. The illumination members provided inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper speaker 19a is provided at each of the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15. Apart from the upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 extending in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projecting forward (toward the player) is provided. The protruding effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect or the like in accordance with the progress of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to a lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball rental operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a luminous effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is interposed in a special figure variable display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or to execute a notice effect in which a result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory is announced in advance. The variable display game includes a special figure variable display game and an ordinary figure variable display game. In the present specification, the simple figure variable display game refers to the special figure variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operation device during the non-execution.

  Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. The special game state is, for example, a specific game state (general power support state or time saving state), a state in which a special result (big hit) is highly likely to occur in a variable display game (probable change state), or a big hit state (special game state). It is.

  Here, the probable change state is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games is executed (number cut type), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. There is a type that continues until it is completed (falling lottery type).

  Furthermore, whether or not to generate a probability change state may not necessarily be determined by the big hit symbol random number, but may be made to always generate a probability change state when a big hit occurs, or a prize winning device or the like having a specific area may be provided and specified. A probable change state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used for discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These buttons are operated by the player. The balance display section 26 is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED therein, and performs a lighting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on a front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 having the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower right speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The shooting speed of the game ball fired from the ball shooting device is set so as to increase as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 increases.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole 23a penetrating the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation section 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

(Game board)
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on a front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantial center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying (variably displaying) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to a device having a liquid crystal display, but may be a device having a display such as an EL or CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and a character for performing a variable display game are displayed in each of the variable display areas. In addition, an image (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which the game balls passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. Have been. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 40b are transferred to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and a part of the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

In the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, three general winning openings 35 are arranged, and in the lower right gaming area 32, one general winning opening 35 is arranged. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  In the gaming area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for providing a start condition of the special figure change display game is provided, and immediately below the starting winning opening (second starting winning opening) (second start winning area). A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning region) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a pair of movable members (movable pieces) 37b whose upper side is opened in an inverted “C” shape and converts the state into a state in which a game ball easily flows. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special figure fluctuation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 normally holds a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) with an interval of about the diameter of a game ball. However, since the starting winning port 36 is provided above the normal variable winning device 37, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the normal variable winning device 37. .

  The movable member 37b opens in a reverse “C” shape via the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general-figure variation display game has a predetermined stop display mode, and the game ball is opened. The state changes to an open state (easy winning state that is advantageous to the player), which easily flows into the normal variable winning device 37.

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the general-floor variation display game or making the hit probability of the general-floor variation display game higher than normal, The specific game state (general power support state, time saving state) is generated by making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above.

  In the game area 32 below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an attacker that opens the first big winning opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling forward by the big winning opening solenoid 1 (38b) (see FIG. 3). A first special variable winning device 38 having an opening / closing door 38c is provided. The first special fluctuation winning device 38 converts the state of the special winning opening from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the first big winning opening. Note that a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the first special winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening.

  Also, in the gaming area 32 at the upper left of the center case 40, a pair of large winning opening solenoids 2 (39b) (see FIG. 3) (see FIG. 3) are opened in an inverted “C” shape to open the second winning opening. A second special fluctuation winning device 39 having a movable member 39c is provided. The second special variable prize winning device 39, like the first special variable prize winning device 38, changes the state of the special winning opening from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game. Is converted to a special game state that is advantageous to the player), and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the second big winning opening. Note that an upper count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the second special winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening.

  When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first large winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38, and the second large winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39. The payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper plate 21 according to the type of the winning prize port. Further, in the game area 32 below the first special variable winning device 38, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like is provided.

  In addition, a special figure change display game (a special figure 1 change display game, a special figure 2 change display game) and a normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A batch display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure change display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure change display unit (a special figure 1 display unit) for a change display game, which is configured with a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The special figure 2 display) 52, the variable display unit (general figure display) 53 for the general figure variable display game, and the storage display unit (special figure 1 reserve) for informing the start (hold) storage number of each variable display game The display 54, the special figure 2 reservation display 55, and the general figure reservation display 56) are provided.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit by displaying a first game state display unit (first game state display) 57. When a time-saving state occurs, it lights up to notify the occurrence of the time-saving state. A second game state display unit (second game state display) 58, and a third game state display unit (third game state) that indicates that the big hit probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. A state indicator, a probability state display section) 59, and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed).

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the ordinary figure change display game and the special figure change display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstruction nails, windmills and the like arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening. 36, the normal fluctuation prize device 37, the first special fluctuation prize device 38 or the second special fluctuation prize device 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Is done. When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of the winning opening. Are discharged to the upper plate 21 via the payout device.

  The general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the general-purpose change display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number for collision determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the general figure variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure variable display game is already running and the general figure variable display game is not ended, or when the result of the general figure variable display game is When the variable prize device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, if the general-purpose starting storage number is less than the upper limit number, the storage number is added (+1).

  The hit figure starting memory stores a hit determination random value for determining a hit / fall of the hit picture variation display game, and when the hit determination random value matches the judgment value, the hit figure variation display is performed. The game results in a specific result mode (specific result).

The general figure change display game is executed on the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is constituted by an LED that indicates a hit in a lighting state as normal identification information (general figure) and indicates a deviation in a non-lighting state, and blinks the LED to change the normal identification information. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined change display time has elapsed.

  If the ordinary figure random number value extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is transferred to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

  At the time of detecting the starting winning ball of the special figure change display game, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, and each change pattern random number are extracted. These random numbers are stored in a special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The stored number of the special figure start prize storage is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are performed by displaying the identification information on the special figure 1 display unit 51 and the special figure 2 display unit 52 and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode. The display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like) are varied and displayed in correspondence with each special figure variation display game.

  In the decorative special symbol change display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order (scroll display), the symbols that fluctuate after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure fluctuating display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest.

  If the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived based on the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numerals such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 and the second special fluctuation winning device 39 are turned on by turning on the special winning opening solenoid 1 (38b) and the special winning opening solenoid 2 (39b) (see FIG. 3). Is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which time the player plays many game balls. The privilege of being able to acquire is given.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure change display games are not executed at the same time. It is set as follows.

  As for the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display regions, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in a device or a display area. In this case, the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. Note that the special figure 2 variable display game is executed prior to the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure change display game, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Also, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (38a) , 39a) include a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. Further, a micro switch having mechanical contacts is provided for a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like. Can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. The CPU 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. Oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a 32 V DC voltage. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a control signal.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, provided on a main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. With the provision, the cost can be reduced by excluding the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32 V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on this, a process for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111b stores invariable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  The ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. In the case where the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle after the display and the result mode is displayed, the state where the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a condition in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meets the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (Excluding the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving a special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and special reach. 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit occurs). That is, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the special result mode is lost). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure change display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or a variable display without a reach (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a universal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111a and a clock for giving an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111a based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

In addition, in the process related to the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure change display game as the current game state, the current game Based on the operating state (normal operating state or time-saving operating state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the state, the number of stored start times, and the like, one of the plural fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired. I do. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111a forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, The gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39 are connected and supplied from these switches. Interface chips (proximity I / Fs) 121a and 121b for receiving a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and converting the signal to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V are provided.

  The proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have an input range of 7V to 11V, so that leads of sensors and proximity switches are short-circuited incorrectly, sensors and switches are disconnected from connectors, and leads are disconnected. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as a floating state and output an abnormality detection signal.

  Two proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are provided because the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The cost of the proximity I / F 121b is reduced by using a smaller one than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the insufficient number of input terminals. The proximity I / F 121a may have a necessary number of input terminals, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123.

  In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

  Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy A signal is also input. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command. Signal. Note that a game sensor may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  Also, the input unit 120 receives a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 and the like and from the payout control device 200. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before the payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 are taken into data. A first input port 122 for supplying the game microcomputer 111 via the bus 140 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (that is, when the game balls are full).

  The input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. However, each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is impossible.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. I have. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting opening / closing data of a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the 39b and the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 1 (38b), the special winning opening solenoid 2 (39b), and the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a for generating and outputting, a second driver 138b for outputting an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from a third output port 135, a fourth output A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the port 136, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

32 V DC is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138 a in order to drive a solenoid operated at 32 V. In addition, the batch display device 50
12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

(Direction control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is provided with a sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are converted into a production control command signal (production command). As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging a hit in a general figure based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34 and reads the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and it is judged whether or not the normal figure change display game is hit.

  Then, after the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display, a general symbol fluctuating display game in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the general fluctuating display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the general fluctuating display, the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuating winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, The opening control is performed as described above (for 0.3 second). That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). When the result of the general-floor variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out-of-position on the general-purpose display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit of the first special figure variable display game is stored based on the starting memory. The random number for determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the first special figure variation display game has hit or missed.

In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the big hit determination disturbance of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed based on the start memory. The numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the second special figure variation display game has hit.

  Then, the CPU 111 a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the first special figure change display game or the second special figure change display game to the effect control apparatus 300. Then, on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure change display game is displayed in which the identification symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stopped. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37). Make

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure change display game is a hit. Let it. In the processing for generating the special game state, the CPU 111a opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b or moves the second special variable winning device 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, for example. Control is performed to release the member 39c and allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening.

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until one of these conditions is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game results in the high probability state, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game can be set. Both of the variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. In the time-saving state, control is performed so that the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 are in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 per unit time is more controlled than when the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 is in the normal operation state. Is controlled so as to substantially increase the opening time.

  For example, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-mentioned general-purpose variable display game (the general-purpose variable display time) to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time (for example, for example). 1000 ms is 10,000 ms). Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is.

  Also, in the time-saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal fluctuation display game being hit, the release time (normal electric power release time) is the first release time (for example, 100 ms) in the normal state. It is possible to control so as to have a longer second opening time (for example, 1352 ms).

  Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening (for example, four times). Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of the winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of general power release times, the general power release time, and the general figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, the setting may be made so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. In addition, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of a main process by the game control device 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The main process is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Subsequently, an interrupt vector setting process for setting a jump destination vector address when an interrupt occurs is executed (A1002), and further, a stack for setting a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. A pointer setting process is executed (A1003).

  Next, game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibition state (A1004). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibition state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, so that the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (the first input port 122) (A1005) and executes an interrupt mode setting process for setting a mode of the interrupt process (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 serving as the main control means
A standby time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for a program of a slave control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from 00 to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The time of the power supply delay timer is measured by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times) ( A1008), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. A determination is made (A1010). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON.

  Further, when the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when no power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008 for setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal.

  When the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control device 100 reads / writes RWM (read / write) such as a RAM or an EEPROM. The access to the memory is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in the game microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 read earlier (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the process shifts to the process of step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process in the case where the power is normally restored from the power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (the result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”), and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A1026 in FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make

  The game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure in an area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure check area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is capable of accepting the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Thereafter, the game control device 100 checks an area in the RWM in which the game state is stored to determine whether the game state is a high probability state (A1022).

Here, when the gaming state is not the high-probability state (result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processing of step A1023 and step A1024 and shifts to the processing of step A1025. If the gaming state is the high probability state (result of A1022 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1023), and the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 50, for example. The ON (lighting) data of the (error indicator) is saved in the segment area (A1024). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1025), and the process proceeds to step A1031. Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when performing the processing of step A1026 after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to the access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command for initializing the RAM to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the process of step A1031.

  In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the processing of step A1025 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A1030 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine, and a hold of special figures 1 and 2. The command includes a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command indicating the number, a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, and a probability information command indicating the probability state. Also, depending on the state at the time of power-off or power-on, a restoration screen command if the special figure fluctuation display game is running at the time of power-off, and a customer waiting demo command if the customer is waiting at the time of power-off If the initialization is performed at the time of power-on, a power-on command is included. Further, it includes an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time reduction information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time reduction state.

  The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the execution of the CTC activation process in step A1031, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the bit transposition pattern according to the first embodiment of this invention. As shown in FIG. 6, for example, the bit transposition pattern refers to a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the lower bit transposition) by replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order. ) Is a pattern that determines how to replace the data when storing the data.

In this embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern shown in FIG. 6, the regularity of the random number can be broken, and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random number for determining a big hit symbol (big hit symbol) The initial value (start value) of the random number 1, the big hit symbol random number 2), and the random number (hit random number) for determining the hit of the ordinary figure is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1033), and interruption is permitted (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the hit random number are in the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit of the program. This is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process).

  In addition, the so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which the start value is changed using the initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step A1035, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and monitors the power failure. It is determined whether the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1035. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (A1034) before the initial value random number updating process (A1035), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority and the timer interrupt is initialized. By being made to wait by the value random number update processing, it is possible to prevent the interruption processing from being overwhelmed.

  Note that the initial value random number update processing in step A1035 may be a method of performing the initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing. When such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing is performed in both cases. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing as in the present embodiment, and only in the main processing, the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing. However, there is an advantage that the main processing is simplified thereby.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is ON (result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. A determination is made (A1038). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not been continued for the number of checks (result of A1038 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON.

  In addition, when the power failure monitoring signal has been kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is prohibited (A1039), and off data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means, when the power is turned on, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (the game control device) 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control unit (game control device 100) stores a RAM 111c that can store data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the elapse of the standby time.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The checksum calculation processing is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

First, the game control device 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as a calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the calculation of the checksum is completed (A1107).

  When the calculation of the checksum is not completed (the result of A1107 is “N”), the game control device 100 repeats the processing from Step A1104 to Step A1107. If the calculation of the checksum has been completed (result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation processing ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the initial value random number updating process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The initial value random number updating process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  The game control device 100 first updates the winning initial value random number by +1 (A1201), and updates the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 by +1 (A1202). Then, the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (A1203), and the initial value random number updating process ends.

  Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a hit in the ordinary figure changing game. "Big hit symbol initial value random number 1" is a random number which is an initial value of a random number which determines the big hit stop symbol of special figure 1, and "big hit symbol initial value random number 2" is a random number which determines the big hit stop symbol of special figure 2. It is a random number that becomes the initial value.

  As described above, the randomness of random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first saves the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM (A1301). In the present embodiment, in the Z80 microcomputer used as a game microcomputer, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes an input process of inputting signals from various sensors and switches and capturing signals, that is, inputting a state of each input port (A1302). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, a general purpose solenoid 37c) is executed (A1303). If a signal of prohibition of firing is output in the process of step A1004 in the main process, a signal of firing permission is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to a state where it can be set to a permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1304), and further performs a random number update process 1 (A1305), The processing 2 (A1306) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, the monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the upper count switch 39a, A winning opening switch / status monitoring process for monitoring an error (for example, whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is executed (A1307).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variable display game (A1308), and subsequently executes a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general map variable display game (A1309). . The details of the special figure game process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the general-purpose game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure changing game and displaying various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1310). The details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet illegal monitoring process of checking a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1311). Further, a radio signal fraud monitoring process is performed in which a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1312). The details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. The details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1313). The details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the interrupt request (A1314). Finally, the data of the register saved in the process of step A1301 is restored (A1315), an interrupt is permitted (A1316), and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1302) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the input process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read state of the input port 1 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1404), and further, bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1405). Then, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1406), and after the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (A1407), the switch read processing is executed (A1408). Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares unused bit data (A1409), and prepares bit data to be inverted (A1410). Further, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (A1411), and the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 is prepared (A1412). After that, a switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process ends.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the switch reading process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and saved to the port input state 1 of the target switch control area (A1503). (A1504). Thereafter, the process waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading has elapsed (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and saved in the port input state 2 of the target switch control area ( (A1509). After that, in the first and second readings, a fixed bit pattern in which the same bit in the state is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 is created (A1510), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time is set. Bit (A1511).

  Next, the game control device 100 creates an undefined bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undefined bit pattern and the value of the last interrupt are set. The logical product with the final state is calculated and set as a previously held bit (A1513). This makes it possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like has been removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the currently determined bit and the previously held bit, and saves the current determined state (A1514). Further, the exclusive OR of the previous and the final determined states is calculated and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process ends.

  When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt processing and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been performed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the determination cannot be performed correctly. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, the above-described problem can be avoided.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1303) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an output process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the game control device 100 outputs (resets) off data to a port 135 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (A1604), and the obtained data is output to the digit output port 136 (A1605). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1606), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (A1607).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to the external information terminal 71, and outputs the data to the external information output port 137 (A1608). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1609). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1610).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and combines the data with the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1611). Further, data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1612). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1613), the output processing ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission processing (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the payout command transmission process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize to which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize port reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Winning data corresponding to a prize ball in which the main prize ball signal is not generated in the used area is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a prize ball number set for each prize port (for example, 2 prize balls, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 13 prize balls, 14 prize balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the count of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that the winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted irrespective of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the processing of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control device 100 determines, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a winning object to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

  When there is no count in the winning number counter area 2 (result of A1701 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area to be checked (A1702). Furthermore, it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

  When all the checks have been completed (result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A1710. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  When there is a count number (result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1704), and sets the target winning number counter. The number of award balls corresponding to the area is obtained (A1705). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired number of prize balls are added and saved as a new prize ball remaining area in the prize ball remaining area (A1706). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before the process of step A1706, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball area is equal to or greater than 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal (A1707). If it is not 10 or more (result of A1707 is "N"), the flow shifts to the process of step A1710. On the other hand, if it is 10 or more (result of A1707 is “Y”), 10 which is a reference number of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (A1708). Further, the value of the main award ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (A1709), and the process returns to the step A1707.

  With the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls during a big hit or the like is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed at the same time as the payout of the game balls, and the accurate It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of award balls cannot be counted.

If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A1710), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1711). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (result of A1711 is “N”), the payout command transmission process ends. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (result of A1711 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status is idle (A1712).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. In other words, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal status is information which sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. The payout busy signal status is an idle state in which the payout control can be started immediately. Either a busy state where control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state where the state is undefined is set.

  When the payout busy signal status is not the idle state (the result of A1712 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the payout command transmission process. The case of not being in the idle state includes the case of being in the busy state and the case of being in the indefinite state. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed. Prevention and reduce the burden of control.

  Note that the undefined state is set by clearing the busy signal status area in the processing at the time of turning on the power, for example. The indefinite state is that the idle state or the busy state is set based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to indicate that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be performed. To eliminate. In other words, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. Instead of transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control device 200 in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, and performs the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command. Can be prevented from being inadvertent.

  When the payout busy signal status is the idle state (result of A1712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1713). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is included in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is.

  Then, when there is no count number (result of A1713 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area to be checked (A1714), and counts all the winning number counter areas. It is determined whether the number check has been completed (A1715). When all the checks have been completed (result of A1715 is "Y"), the payout command transmission process is completed. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (result of A1715 is “N”), the process returns to step A1713, and the processes from step A1713 to A1715 are repeated.

If there is a count number (the result of A1713 is “Y”), the game control device 100 decrements (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1716), and sets the target winning number counter. The payout command corresponding to the area is obtained (A1717). Then, the payout command is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1718), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1719), and thereafter, the payout command transmission processing ends. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. In the case shown, it constitutes a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, the prize is provided only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the prize that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that the data is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up on the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for performing the payout.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2000-327759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on this data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present embodiment, accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for backing up in the payout control device 200.

  Further, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can output the prize ball. The timing can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the prize areas (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, first special variable prize apparatus 38, Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable winning device 39), and payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the game, wherein the game control means outputs a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. ), A control is performed to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored from the power outage, a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. And However, the award ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means for a predetermined period. This means that the ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

In the game area 32, a plurality of winning areas having different numbers of prize balls (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) are provided, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, for each number of prize balls, whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The state signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. It will be.

  In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a predetermined prize area (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, first special variable prize apparatus 38, second special variable prize apparatus 39) is controlled. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) for controlling payout of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means is capable of starting the payout control by outputting a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when the game ball is in play, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in a predetermined prize area. Including prize ball An external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, wherein the external information output means outputs a state signal from the payout control means, This means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  The prize-ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) immediately transmits the prize-ball command when the power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information related to a prize ball command, and a prize capable of storing information related to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined prize area (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, first prize port 35, A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special fluctuation prize device 38 and the second special fluctuation prize device 39), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball is generated. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. And By updating when a game ball is awarded to a fixed winning area and updating it in accordance with the transmission of the award ball command to the payout control means, the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and updates when a game ball wins in the predetermined winning area, By performing the update in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update processing 1]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1305 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random number, the big hit symbol random number 1 and the big hit symbol random number 2 which are targets of the initial value random number update process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number in the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801). If the hit random number in the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (A1801 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). .

  On the other hand, when the hit random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1801 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the hit random number initial value random number as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded random number is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding a start value of a corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804).

  When the big hit symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A1807 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (A1804 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number 1 is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding a start value of a corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the jackpot symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “N”), the random number update processing 1 is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 2 is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding a start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809), and the random number updating process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update processing 2]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the random number update process 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Further, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

  First, the game control device 100 updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is a target of the current update process (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads a value of a register such as a refresh register (hereinafter, referred to as an R register) in which a random value is set (A1904). For example, the refresh register is used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a game microcomputer in the present embodiment. By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the R register, and masks the value of the R register (A1905). The mask value is different from the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are updated. Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower register 1 of the R register is updated. Although four bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is merely an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). Then, when the random number area is the upper one byte of the 2-byte random number (result of A1906 is “Y”), the value left by masking the value of the R register with the mask value of the upper one byte as an added value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as a "masked value"), a mask update value is set by adding "1" to the mask update value, the lower one byte is set to "0" (A1907), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1909.

  When the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the upper 1 byte to “0” as an added value and sets the lower 1 byte to The mask update value is set (A1908), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A1909. Note that the reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, so that adding “0” does not change the value.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “Y”), a value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper one byte of the random number value, and the lower one byte of the random number value is set as the lower one byte of the random number value. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A1912.

  The game control device 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the processing of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random number value, and determines whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value obtained in the processing of A1903. It is determined whether or not it is (A1913).

  Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control device 100 stores the new random number value in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is set as a new random number value again (A1914). The random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (
A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “N”), the random number updating process 2 ends. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, the value is saved) in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and ends the random number update processing 2.

  As described above, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the startup winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for the purpose.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the main process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the lower count switches 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (A2001). Then, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (A2002). Details of the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The fraud monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, The information of the winning number upper limit value (the number of fraud occurrence determination), the winning opening monitoring table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. In the winning opening monitoring table, information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the address of the winning number counter area 1, and the address of the winning number counter area 2 are defined. As these fraud monitoring tables and winning opening monitoring tables, those corresponding to the respective switches to be monitored are prepared.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (A2003). Then, a fraud & win monitoring process for monitoring a fraudulent winning and detecting a normal winning is executed (A2004).

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a fraud monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper winning prize port (the second special variable prize device 38) (A2005), monitors the fraudulent prize, and obtains a normal prize. The detected fraud & winning monitoring process is executed (A2006).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares an illegality monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting switch 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone (A2007), monitors the illegal winning and detects a normal winning, and monitors the illegal winning. The processing is executed (A2008).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require the fraud monitoring process (A2009), Is executed (A2010).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose state is to be monitored is to be monitored this time (A2011). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range from 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred or not is executed (A2013). The details of the gaming machine state check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, monitoring of the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch, etc. If the value is set and the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the shot-out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the abnormal payout status signal is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred or not is executed (A2015).

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and the state scan is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (result of A2016 is "N"), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (result of A2016 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2017) to determine whether an error has occurred. The game machine state check processing for determining the state of the game machine is executed (A2018).

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, it is possible to monitor the state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like. Is set. Note that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). The status monitoring process ends. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the fraudulent and winning monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The fraud & winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, A2006, A2008 in the winning port switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The fraudulent & winning monitoring process is performed on each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is the processing that is performed. The large winning prize openings (special fluctuation prize devices 38 and 39) and the ordinary electric power (normal fluctuation prize device 37) tend to be forcibly opened by opening and closing members to insert game balls and pay out prize balls. Monitor fraudulent activity in addition to detecting fraud.

  The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be monitored for error (A2101), and determines whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (A2102). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning monitor switch for error monitoring is the lower count switch 38a. Alternatively, this is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning switch for error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a. Further, this is a period other than a state in which the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the ordinary figure when the winning port switch for error monitoring is the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  Then, when it is during the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the added illegal winning number after addition is determined as the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination. It is determined whether the number has exceeded the number (for example, 5) (A2105).

  The reason why the determination number is set to five is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball passes the validity period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where the player wins a prize or a case where noise is present on a signal from being determined to be invalid, and to prevent an error from being easily determined even if the signal is not invalid.

  Then, when the number does not exceed the determined number (the result of A2105 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). If the number exceeds the determined number (result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of illegal winnings is kept at the number of determined fraud occurrences (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud occurrence command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud prize occurrence flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table of the target winning port switch (A2110), and sets a winning ball. A counter updating process is executed (A2111). Details of the winning counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the update of the notification timer is permitted (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if updating of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), if the target notification timer is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning monitor switch for error monitoring is one lower count switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning monitor switch for error monitoring is the other lower count switch 38a. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently with respect to the fraudulent notification regarding the first special variable winning device 38, thereby preventing the time from being increased by half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . If the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the upper count switch 39a or the starting port 2 switch 37a, the updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115). If the value is not 0 (result of A2115 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up. Terminates the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target unauthorized release command is prepared (A2116), and the unauthorized flag is set. To prepare an unauthorized winning release flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, Clears the target number of illegal winnings (A2119).

  Also, the game control device 100, after the processing of step A2119 ends, or when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer has become 0 (result of A2118 is "N"), that is, the fraudulent & winning monitoring processing before the previous time When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the command setting process is performed. Is executed (A2122). Then, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated.

  With the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an unauthorized winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the winning number counter updating process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2010 of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 16 and in step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first obtains the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (exactly, an input change). (A2202). If there is no input (result of A2202 is “N”), it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2211).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203), and stores the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2205).

  When no overflow has occurred (result of A2205 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the process of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow has occurred (result of A2205 is "Y"), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether or not overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2209). If no overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the process of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow has occurred (result of A2209 is “Y”), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2211).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (result of A2211 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2202 which determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2211 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process ends. With the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Command setting processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a command setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2301) and reads the serial transmission buffer status (A2302). Further, it is determined whether a command is being transmitted (A2303).

  In addition, when the command is not being transmitted (result of A2303 is “N”), the game control device 100 initializes the transmission circuit (A2304) because the circuit may be abnormal, and transmits the command data (MODE (upper byte)). ) Is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer (A2305).

  The game control device 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer after the process of step A2305 is completed or when the command is being transmitted (result of A2303 is “Y”) ( A2306).

  Further, the game control device 100 reads the serial transmission buffer status (A2307) and determines whether or not a command is being transmitted (A2308). If the command is being transmitted (result of A2308 is “Y”), the command setting process ends.

  When the command is not being transmitted (the result of A2308 is “N”), the game control device 100 initializes the transmission circuit because there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the circuit (A2309). Then, after the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer (A2310), the command setting process ends.

  As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the command analysis can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to take in the command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The gaming machine state check processing is executed in steps A2013, A2015 and A2018 in the winning port switch / state monitoring processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2402). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2402 is “N”), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2403), and the state off command is obtained. Then, preparations are made (A2404). Further, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2405).

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires the target state on command, and (A2407). Further, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2408).

  When the processing of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they do not match (the result of A2409 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). When the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the updated value of the status monitoring timer is smaller than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by −1 and sets the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2414). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (the result of A2415 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing ends.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2415 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, a command setting process is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check process ends.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the payout busy signal check process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The payout busy signal check processing is executed in step A2019 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is ON (A2501). Note that the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a busy state flag as the determination status (A2502). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is not on (the result of A2501 is “N”), an idle state flag is set as the determination status (A2503). After the determination status is set, the previous busy signal data is loaded (A2504).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current signal is different from the previous signal, that is, determines whether or not there has been a change between on and off (A2505). If the current signal is different from the previous signal (the result of A2505 is "Y"), the state of the current signal is saved as the previous busy signal data (A2506), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (A2507).

  The game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 after the process of step A2507 ends or when the current signal is not different from the previous signal (result of A2505 is "N") (A2508).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time measured by the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) (A2509). If the signal determination time has not been reached (result of A2509 is "N"), the payout busy signal check process ends. On the other hand, when the signal determination time has been reached (result of A2509 is "Y"), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept short of the determination time (A2510), and the value of the busy signal status area is determined to be the determination status. It is determined whether they match (A2511).

  Then, when the value of the busy signal status area matches the determination status (result of A2511 is “Y”), game control device 100 ends the payout busy signal check process. If it does not match the determination status (the result of A2511 is “N”), the determination status is saved in the busy signal status area (A2512), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

  By the payout busy signal check process, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, the busy signal status is not changed immediately even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and And so on.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. In response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, and performs the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command. Can be prevented from being inadvertent.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1308) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure game process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a start-up switch monitoring process for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the starting winning port 36 and the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37 forming the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, and a special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is performed. At the stage before the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance. The details of the start-up switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of a game ball by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is monitored. . The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 unless the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2603). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604).

  When the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the special figure game processing number to A special figure game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A2605). Further, a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Then, the return address after the completion of the branch processing is saved in the stack area (A2607), and the game branch processing is executed according to the game processing number (A2608).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A2608, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the change of the special figure change display game, sets the start of the change of the special figure change display game, sets the effect, The special figure ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure change processing is performed (A2609). The details of the special figure ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” in step A2608, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, sets information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process, and the like. A figure change process is executed (A2610). The details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is “2” in step A2608, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, to set a fan fare command according to the type of the big hit, to set a fan fare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and to perform processing during the fan fare / interval. A special figure displaying process for setting information necessary for the process is executed (A2611). The details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “3” in step A2608, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and updates the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening. A fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A2612). The details of the special figure displaying process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53A and 53B.

  If the game processing number is “4” in step A2608, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the last round, and sets an ending command if it is the last round, A special winning opening opening process for setting information necessary for performing the special winning opening residual ball processing is executed (A2613). Details of the processing during opening of the special winning opening will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “5” in step A2608, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the last round, A special winning port remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is executed (A2614). The details of the special winning port remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “6” in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes a big hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure ordinary process (A2615). The details of the big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the game process number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2616), and then performs the symbol variation control processing related to the special figure 1 display 51. Is executed (A2617). Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2618), a symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2619). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A2616, and executes the subsequent processing. Execute.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring processing (A2601) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the first start port (start winning port 36) (A2701), and then executes a special drawing start port switch common process (A2702). Note that the details of the special figure starting port switch common processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 together with the special figure starting port switch common processing in step A2706.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is operating, that is, whether the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operating and the game ball can be won. It is determined whether or not it is (A2703). If the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (result of A2703 is “Y”), the processing after step A2705 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2703 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal operation of the ordinary power is occurring (A2704). In the determination as to whether or not the irregularity of the ordinary telephone is occurring, it is determined that the irregularity is occurring when the number of illegal winnings in the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of determined irregularities (for example, five). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  When the normal illegal operation is not occurring (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (A2705). . Subsequently, a special figure starting port switch common process is executed (A2706), and the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. The details of the special figure start port switch common processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the illegal operation of the ordinary telephone is occurring (the result of A2704 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the start-up switch monitoring process. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure startup port switch common processing (A2702, A2706) in the above-described startup port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a common process for the special figure starting port switch according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special drawing starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the monitored start switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2801). If there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (result of A2801 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (result of A2801 is “Y”), game control device 100 determines whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2802). . If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (result of A2802 is “N”), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special drawing start port switch common process ends.

  In addition, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the starting port winning flag of the starting port switch to be monitored (A2803). The extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (A2804).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start-up switch among the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the count, is loaded (A2805). Further, the value of the loaded start port signal output count is updated by +1 (A2806), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2807).

  When the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2807 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start port signal output number area of the RWM (A2808). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2807 is “Y”), the process of step A2809 is executed without executing the process of step A2808.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2809). If the number of special figure reservations is less than the upper limit value (the result of A2809 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by +1 (A2812). . Further, a command for the number of suspended special figures to be monitored corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figures to be suspended is prepared (A2813), and a command setting process is executed (A2814).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure reservation number corresponding to the start-up switch to be monitored (A2815), and saves the big hit random number into the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (A2815). A2816). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2817), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2818). Further, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (A2819). Finally, the special figure suspension information determination processing is executed (A2820), and the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. The details of the special figure suspension information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning prize port 36 or the start winning prize area of the normal variable winning device 37, and has the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. The start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port (start winning port 36) in a first starting number up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2809 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (reservation overflow command) (A2810). Thereafter, a command setting process is executed (A2811), and the common process for the special figure starting port switch ends.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (A2820) in the above-described startup port switch common processing will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure suspension information determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead (prior determination) processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a condition for executing a prefetch effect is satisfied (A2901). If the condition is not satisfied (the result of A2901 is “N”), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. If the condition is satisfied (the result of A2901 is “Y”), the following processing related to the prefetch effect is executed.

Here, the case where the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied means that the input of the starting port switch in the processing of step A2801 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 24) is the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a. There are cases. Further, when the input of the start-up switch in the process of step A2801 of the common process of the special opening start-up switch is the input of the start-up 1 switch 36a, when the opening extension function of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is not operating, that is, This is a case where the player is not in a time saving state and is not in a big hit (special game state).

  If the condition for executing the prefetching effect is satisfied (the result of A2901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit A big hit determination process for determining whether or not a big hit is performed (A2902) is determined (A2903). The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the determination result is a big hit (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (A2904). Further, the big hit symbol random number is checked to acquire a corresponding big hit stop symbol pattern (A2905), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern area (A2907).

  On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A2903 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a missing stop symbol pattern (A2906), and saves the stopped symbol pattern in the prefetch stop symbol pattern area (A2906). A2907).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern (A2908), and executes a command setting process (A2909).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process of setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A2910). The details of the special figure information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a second half variation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target starting port switch (A2911), and executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A2912). . The details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation number indicating the first variation pattern and the second variation number indicating the second variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A2913). Thereafter, a command setting process is executed (A2914), and the special figure suspension information determination process ends. The special figure information setting processing in step A2910 and the variation pattern setting processing in step A2912 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure ordinary processing described later.

  With the above processing, a pre-reading symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the pre-reading target and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The information can be notified to the device 300. In particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, the player can obtain the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. Can be notified.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judge whether or not). In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Grand prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39) is being opened, that is, whether the special gaming state is being performed. (A3001). If the special winning opening is not being opened (result of A3001 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  When the special winning opening is open (result of A3001 is “Y”), the game control device 100 counts the number of winnings to the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process. The winning counter is set to 0 (A3002). Then, it is determined whether or not the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (A3003). ).

  If the lower special winning opening is open (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is performed at the end of one round. (A3004). If the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (result of A3004 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  When the special winning opening remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3004 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch 1 (one lower counting switch 38a). Is determined (A3005). If there is no input to the lower-large winning opening switch 1 (result of A3005 is "N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower-large winning opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (A3009). .

  In addition, when there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3005 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 updates the winning counter by +1 (A3006) and prepares a lower large winning opening count command. (A3007). Then, a command setting process is executed (A3008), and it is determined whether or not the lower large winning opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) has an input (A3009).

  When there is no input to the lower large winning opening switch 2 (result of A3009 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3018). Further, when there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch 2 (result of A3009 is "Y"), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3010), and a lower large winning opening count command is prepared (A3011). Then, a command setting process is executed (A3012), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3018).

On the other hand, when the lower large winning opening is not open (the result of A3003 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 opens the upper winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) (second). In the case of a special game state in which the special fluctuation winning device 39 is opened), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning port switch (up count switch 39a) (A3013). When there is no input to the upper winning opening switch (the result of A3013 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, when there is an input to the upper winning a prize port switch (result of A3013 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize winning port remaining ball is being processed (A3014). If the winning prize opening ball is not being processed (the result of A3014 is “N”), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3015), and a top winning prize opening count command is prepared (A3016).

  In addition, when the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (the result of A3014 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares an upper special winning opening count command (A3016). Thereafter, a command setting process is executed (A3017), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3018). In the case of the upper winning prize port, the upper prize winning port count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball to perform an effect by winning.

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3018 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (result of A3018 is "N"), the value of the winning counter is added to the large winning opening count (A3019).

  Further, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the large winning opening count is equal to or more than an upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (A3020). If the special winning opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (result of A3020 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

  When the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A3020 is “Y”), the game control device 100 keeps the special winning opening count at the upper limit (A3021), The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3022). Then, the pointer is loaded from the large hit control pointer upper limit area (A3023), and the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit control pointer area (A3024), and thereafter, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (A2617, A2619) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a symbol variation control process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of a special symbol such as the first special figure or the second special figure and setting display data of the special symbol.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the special figure change control flag of the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled among the first special figure and the second special figure is changing. (A3101).

  Then, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure change control flag is changing (A3102), and when the special figure changing flag is changing (A3102 result). Is "Y"), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the to-be-controlled figure (for example, the first toe figure) is acquired (A3103). Further, of the first special map and the second special map, the blink control timer for the special map to be controlled (for example, the first special map) is updated by -1 (A3104), and the value of the timer is 0, that is, It is determined whether the time is up (A3105).

When the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (the result of A3105 is “N”), the game control device 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area (A3108). If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (result of A3105 is "Y"), the initial value of the blink control timer is saved in the blink control timer area to be controlled (A3106). Further, of the first special figure and the second special figure, the variable symbol number relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (A3107), and the variable symbol number corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is updated. Display data to be obtained is obtained (A3108). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A3111), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (the result of A3102 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the symbol display table (for example, the first special figure) corresponding to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure). (For stop) is acquired (A3109). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target stopped symbol number area is obtained (A3110), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (A3111), and the symbol variation control processing is ended. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. Becomes

(Tokuzu usual processing)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (A2609) in the aforementioned special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 suspension number (second startup storage number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start storage number) is 0 or not (A3206).

  Then, when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3211). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (the result of A3211 is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration flag is saved in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3212).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demonstration command (A3213), and executes a command setting process (A3214). Further, the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 is executed (A3215), and thereafter, the special figure ordinary processing ends. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has been started (the result of A3211 is “Y”), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (A3215) is executed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  Here, the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” related to the special map ordinary process as the process number (A3301). Subsequently, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3302), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3303). Then, a flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (A3304), and a flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (A3305). After that, the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure ordinary processing in FIG. If the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number after −1 update ( A3202), and executes a command setting process (A3203). Next, the special figure 2 change start processing is executed (A3204), the special figure change processing transition setting processing of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and then the special figure ordinary processing ends. The details of the special figure 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. The details of the special figure changing process transition setting processing of the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number after −1 update. (A3207), and executes a command setting process (A3208). Next, the special figure 1 change start processing is executed (A3209), and further, the special figure change processing transition setting processing of the special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and thereafter the special figure ordinary processing ends. The details of the special figure 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the details of the special-figure-variation process transition setting process of the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  At the time of performing the processing (A3207, A3202) for preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the subtraction of the reservation number based on the start of the special figure change display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 reservation number or the special number is not performed. A reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number or the special figure 2 reserved number obtained by subtracting -1 from the reserved number of FIG. 2 is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the change start information setting processing (see FIG. 38) in the special figure 1 change start processing (A3209) or the special figure 2 change start processing (A3204). Is executed in the process of step A4211.

  As described above, the check of the special figure 2 reservation number is performed before the check of the special figure 1 reservation number, and if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, the special figure 2 change start process (A3204) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the second special figure change display game is executed prior to the first special figure change display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 change start processing (A3209) in the aforementioned special figure ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure change display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the change symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting the big hit information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure change display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404). Details of the special figure information setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set (see FIG. A3405).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game (A3406). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Lastly, the game control device 100 executes a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the aforementioned special figure 1 change start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3501). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM to prepare (A3502). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the big hit is determined to be a big hit according to whether or not the obtained big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (A3503). Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (A3504). If it is a big hit (result of A3504 is "Y"), the big hit in which the outlier information is saved in the process of step A3501 The big hit information is overwritten in the flag 1 area and saved (A3505), and the big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process is not a jackpot (result of A3504 is “N”), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends while saving the information for the jackpot flag 1.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, the details of the big hit determination processing (A2902, A3503) in the above-described special figure hold information determination processing (FIG. 25) and the big hit flag 1 setting processing (FIG. 31) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the jackpot determination process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3601), and determines whether the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3602). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3602 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit is a miss, the game control device 100 sets the big hit as the determination result (A3607), and determines the big hit. The process ends.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3602 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is in the high probability state (A3603). If the state is the high probability state (the result of A3603 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value during the high probability is set (A3604). On the other hand, if the state is not the high probability state (result of A3603 is “N”), an upper limit judgment value during low probability is set (A3605).

When the upper limit determination value of the big hit random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3606). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (result of A3606 is “Y”), that is, if the value is a loss, a loss is set as the determination result (A3607). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3606 is “N”), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3608). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination processing ends.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A3403) in the aforementioned special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A3701). If the big hit is a big hit (the result of A3701 is “Y”), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations) 1), and loads a jackpot symbol random number (A3702). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A3703), and the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A3704). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a big hit stop symbol information table (A3705), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A3706). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the probability variation determination flag area (A3707). The probability change determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special game state.

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the round number upper limit information area (A3708), and acquires the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number. To save in the special winning opening information area (A3709). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A3701 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of a miss in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A3710), and stops the miss. The symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A3711).

  When the processing of Step A3709 or Step A3711 is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A3712). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (A3713), and executes a command setting process (A3714). The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Finally, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A3715), and clears the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A3716). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (A3404) in the aforementioned special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure information setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during special figure time reduction (time reduction state) (A3801). If the special figure is not during working hours (result of A3801 is “N”), a normal fluctuation pattern selection group information table is set (A3802). On the other hand, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (result of A3801 is “Y”), a variation pattern selection group information table for the time reduction is set (A3803).

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure reserved number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag (A3804), acquires the variable pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure reserved number, and saves it in the variable distribution information 1 area. (A3805). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of the special figure (the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) in which the fluctuation is started, the number-of-reservations information that is information on the number of start storages for the type of the special figure, and the time saving The fluctuation distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including the information on the state or not is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is used later to select a fluctuation group. Note that a fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a distribution base pointer table (A3806) and acquires a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A3807). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (A3808), and the value after the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A3809). After that, the special figure information setting process ends.

  By the above processing, the variation distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is used later to select a fluctuation group. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time reduction state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting processing (A3406, A4306) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 30) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 39) described below will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a variation pattern setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A3901), and acquires and prepares an address of the second half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A3902).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (A3903). If the effect mode number is not less than 2 (result of A3903 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is a lost stop symbol pattern (A3904). If the stop symbol pattern is not the missing stop symbol pattern (result of A3904 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A3907.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode number is less than 2 (the result of A3903 is “Y”), or when the stop symbol pattern is a lost stop symbol pattern (the result of A3904 is “Y”) ), The address of the table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 1 is obtained from the table prepared in the process of step A3902 (A3905). Further, the obtained address is prepared as an address of the second half fluctuation group (A3906).

  In the present embodiment, when the effect mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is a lost stop symbol pattern, the fluctuation distribution information 1 obtained from the number-of-reservations information, which is information relating to the number of start storages, is also taken into account. By acquiring the address in this way, the manner of selecting the variation pattern differs depending on the number of starting memories.

  The game control device 100 loads and prepares the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A3907) and executes a 2-byte distribution process (A3908). Further, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (A3909), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared. (A3910). Furthermore, a distribution process of the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A3911), a second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (A3912). By the above processing, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A3913), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second variation number) (A3914). Then, the address of the first half change selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A3915).

  Further, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a random number from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A3916). After that, a distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A3917), the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first variation number area (A3918), and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  By the above processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution processing (A3908) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the 2-byte distribution processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The two-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second-half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the second half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4001), It is determined whether there is no distribution (A4002).

Here, the second half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation pattern group, but defines the second half variation pattern group in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In a fluctuation group table (for example, some fluctuation group tables in the case where the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, and therefore, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top. .

  Then, when the first data of the second half fluctuation group table is a code without distribution (result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of data corresponding to the result of distribution (A4007). ) The two-byte distribution process ends.

  On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half fluctuation group table is not a code without distribution (result of A4002 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets one distribution value first specified in the second half fluctuation group table. Is acquired (A4003).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in the processing of step A4003 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in the processing of step A3907 of the fluctuation pattern setting processing to obtain a new value. A random value is calculated (A4004). Furthermore, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4005).

  When the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (result of A4005 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address to the next distribution value (A4006), and then performs the processing after step A4003. Execute That is, a distribution value specified next in the fluctuation group selection table is acquired (A4003), and the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number determined in step A4005 as a new random value, and the new random value is further added. Is calculated (A4004). Then, with respect to the calculated new random number value, each process is executed until it is determined in the process of step A4005 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4005 is “Y”). As a result, one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table defined in the second-half variation group table.

  Then, when the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4005 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (A4007), and has 2 bytes. The distribution processing ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A3911, A3917) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a sorting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The distribution process selects the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the prepared second-half change selection table (selection table) or the first-half change selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”). (A4101), it is determined whether or not there is a distribution (A4102).

  Here, the second-half change selection table and the first-half change selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half fluctuation pattern and the first-half fluctuation pattern, as in the second-half fluctuation group table. In the case of a selection table having no assignment, the assignment value “0”, that is, a code without assignment is specified at the top.

If the first data in the second-half change selection table or the first-half change selection table is a code without sorting (result of A4102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4107), and the distribution process ends.

  On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second-half change selection table or the first-half change selection table is not a code without sorting (result of A4102 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the second-half change selection table or the first-half change selection table to The first prescribed distribution value is obtained (A4103).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value obtained in step A4103 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 2 or the variation pattern random number 3) loaded in the processing of step A3910 or step A3916, and obtains a new value. A random value is calculated (A4104). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4105).

  When the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (result of A4105 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4106), and executes the processing of step A4103 and thereafter. Execute. That is, the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4103), and the randomized value determined in step A4105 is subtracted as a new random number, and the distributed value is subtracted. A random number value is calculated (A4104). Then, the processing is performed until it is determined that the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4105 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table.

  If the new random number is smaller than “0” (result of A4105 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of the distribution (A4107), and performs the distribution process. To end.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, the details of the change start information setting process (A3407) in the aforementioned special figure 1 change start process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first clears a random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4201). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4202), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4203). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (A4204), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is acquired (A4205).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4206), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4207). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4208), and further a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (A4209). Then, a command setting process for transmitting a variable command is executed (A4210).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag by -1 (A4211), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag (A4212). Further, the random number storage area is shifted (A4213), and the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A4214).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 first clears the stop extension information area as a process related to extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variable display game (A4215). Then, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is missing (A4126), whether or not the effect mode number is 2 (A4127), and whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed is 1 (A4128).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines that the stop symbol pattern is a lost stop symbol pattern (the result of A4216 is “Y”), the effect mode number is 2 (the result of A4217 is “Y”), and the effect mode is If the remaining number of revolutions (the number of games) is 1 (result of A4218 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability (high probability state) is in effect (A4219).

  When the special figure high probability is not present (A4219 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop extension information 1 in the stop extension information area (A4220). Then, a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (A4222), and a command setting process is executed (A4223). Thereafter, the change start information setting process ends. As a result, the special time extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) in which the stop time is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time) is set.

  In addition, when the special figure is in the high probability state (the result of A4219 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the stop extension information 2 in the stop extension information area (A4221). Then, a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (A4222), and a command setting process is executed (A4223). Thereafter, the change start information setting process ends. As a result, the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time), in which the stop time is longer than the normal special figure display time, is set.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not a lost stop symbol pattern (the result of A4216 is “N”), the effect control number is not 2 (the result of A4217 is “N”), or the effect mode 2 If the remaining number of revolutions (the number of games) is not 1 (the result of A4218 is “N”), the change start information setting process ends. In this case, the extension of the stop time is not set, and the normal stop time is set.

  As described above, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, whether or not the rotation speed is the specific rotation speed, and the state of the effect mode. Is being done. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set a continuous effect with the fluctuation time and the stop time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 change start processing (A3204) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the second special figure change display game, and is the same processing as the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. It is done as.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a special figure 2 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the change symbol discrimination area (A4301). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure change display game is a big hit is executed (A4302).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A4303). Further, a special figure information setting process (see FIG. 34) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is executed (A4304). Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for setting various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set (A4305).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 35) for setting a variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game (A4306). Finally, a change start information setting process (see FIG. 38) for setting information on the start of change of the second special figure change display game is executed (A4307), and the special figure 2 change start processing ends.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A4302) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In this processing, the same processing as the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 31 is performed for the second start storage.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A4401). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A4402). Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a big hit determination process (see FIG. 32) for determining whether or not the big hit is determined to be a big hit according to whether or not the obtained big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (A4403). If the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (result of A4404 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the missed information was saved in the process of step A4401 ( A4405) Then, the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process is not a jackpot (the result of A4404 is “N”), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the information on the jackpot flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A4303) in the aforementioned special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In this processing, the same processing as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing shown in FIG. 33 is performed for the second start storage.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4501). If it is a big hit (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations) 1), and loads a jackpot symbol random number (A4502). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4503), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol number area (A4504). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a big hit stop symbol information table (A4505), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4506). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the probability variation determination flag area (A4507). The probability change determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special game state.

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the round number upper limit information area (A4508), and acquires the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number. To save in the special winning opening information area (A4509). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4501 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4510), and stops the loss. The symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4511).

  When the processing in step A4509 or step A4511 is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4512). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (A4513), and executes a command setting process (A4514). The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Finally, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4515), and clears the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4516). ). After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variable winning). A variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37). In addition, the game control device 100 forms a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Transition setting during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 1) according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is executed in step A3210 in the special figure changing process shift setting process shown in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the process number (A4601), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4602).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A4603), and saves a signal related to the start of change of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4604). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A4605), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (for example, 200 ms) (A4606). After that, the special-figure-change processing transition setting process (Toku-zu 1) ends.

[Transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process transition setting processing (special figure 2) according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure changing process shift setting process (special figure 2) is executed in step A3205 in the special figure changing process shift setting process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the process number (A4701), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4702).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A4703), and saves a signal related to the start of change in the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4704). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4705), and the initial value (for example, the timer of the flash cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) of the flash control timer is stored in the special figure 2 flash control timer area. 200 ms) (A4706). After that, the special-figure-change processing transition setting process (Toku-zu 2) ends.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the details of the special figure change processing (A2610) in the aforementioned special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (A4801). If there is no stop extension information (result of A4801 is “N”), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4802). Finally, the special figure display process shift setting process is executed (A4806), and the special figure changing process ends.

  On the other hand, when there is stop extension information (result of A4801 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is stop extension information 1 (A4803). If it is the stop extension information 1 (result of A4803 is “Y”), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4804).

  On the other hand, when the game is not the stop extension information 1 (the result of A4803 is “N”), that is, when it is the stop extension information 2, the game control device 100 sets the special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) to the special figure game. The data is saved in the processing timer area (A4805).

  After setting the special figure extended display time in the special figure game processing timer area, the game control device 100 finally executes the special figure displaying process shift setting process (A4806), and ends the special figure changing process. The details of the special-migration-display processing shift setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Transition setting processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process transition setting process (A4806) in the above described special figure changing process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure displaying process shift setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” for the special figure displaying process (A4901), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4902).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the change in Toku-zu in the test signal output data area (A4903), and further saves a signal relating to the end of the change in Toku-zu in the test signal output data area (A4903). A4904).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal (A4905).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the stop of the fluctuation in the special figure 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. (A4906). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (A4907). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, the details of the special figure display processing (A2611) in the aforementioned special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 loads the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process (A5001), and clears the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A5002). Then, it is determined whether a big hit is set in the loaded big hit flag 2 (A5003).

  When the big hit is set to the big hit flag 2 (the result of A5003 is “Y”), the game control device 100 clears the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A5008). Further, a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (the special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure change display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5009).

  On the other hand, when the big hit is not set in the big hit flag 2 (the result of A5003 is “N”), the big hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process 1 is loaded (A5004), and the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (A5005). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is set to a big hit (A5006).

  When the big hit flag 1 is set to the big hit (the result of A5006 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sends a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (the special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variable display game. The data is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5007).

When the big hit is set to the big hit flag 1 or the big hit flag 2, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit value table (A5010). After that, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A5011). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5012).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM (A5013), and executes a command setting process (A5014). Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (A5015), and a command setting process is executed. (A5016). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (A5017), and the command setting process is executed (A5018). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves, in the external information output data area of the RWM, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game. (A5019). Then, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5020).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the special winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39) corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5021). . Further, a flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area of the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5022).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag (A5023), and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5024). Thereby, the information of the effect mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (A5025), and ends the special figure display processing. The details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the big hit is not set to the big hit flag 1 (the result of A5006 is “N”), that is, when the result of the special figure variable display game is out of order, the game control device 100 relates to the setting of the effect mode. An effect mode information check process is executed (A5026). The effect mode information check processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a time reduction variation number update process for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for reducing the time (A5027). The details of the time reduction change frequency update process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the game control device 100 executes the special figure ordinary process shift setting processing 1 (A5028, see FIG. 29), and ends the special figure displaying process.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (A5025) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the game control device 100 sets “3”, which is a process number relating to the fanfare / interval process (A5101), and saves the process number set in the special figure game process number area (A5102).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) in the external information output data area (A5103), and saves a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state to the test signal output data area. (A5104).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 clears a round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (A5105). Further, the number of low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (A5106), and the low figure low probability & no power support flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (A5107).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A5108), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display section 59) related to the display of the high probability state in order to turn off the high probability notification flag area. Is cleared (A5109). Further, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5110).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the power failure restoration transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (A5111). Further, the time shortening change frequency area for managing the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in the time saving state is cleared (A5112). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal probability state and the normal operation state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (A5113), and clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (A5114). Further, the non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (A5115). Finally, the command of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode command area (A5116), and thereafter, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check processing (A5026) in the above-described special figure displaying processing will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the effect mode information check processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5201). If the next mode transition information is a code without update (result of A5201 is “Y”), the effect mode information check processing ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed in accordance with the number of executed special figure change display games, and for example, the effect mode in which the high probability state continues until the next big hit is selected. .

  When the next mode transition information is not the no-update code (result of A5201 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining effect rotation, which is the number of executable times of the special figure change display game until the change of the effect mode. The number is updated by -1 (A5202), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed has become 0 (A5203).

  In the case where the effect remaining rotation speed becomes 0 (the result of A5203 is “Y”), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table. Is set (A5204), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (A5205).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted, saves the effect mode number in the effect mode number area (A5206), acquires the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be shifted, and stores the remaining effect rotational speed in the effect remaining speed region. Save (A5207). Then, the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is obtained and saved in the next mode shift information area (A5208).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (A5209), and saves the command in the effect mode command area (A5210). Finally, a command setting process is executed (A5211), and the effect mode information check process ends.

  On the other hand, if the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (the result of A5203 is “N”), that is, if the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 determines that the remaining effect rotation It is determined whether the number is a specified number of revolutions (for example, eight times) (A5212). When the effect remaining rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (result of A5212 is “N”), the effect mode information check processing ends.

  In addition, when the effect remaining rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (result of A5212 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares an effect mode switching preparation command (A5213) and executes the command setting process ( A5214) Then, the effect mode information check processing ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving an advance notice of the switching from a predetermined number of revolutions before the switching of the effect mode. By managing the effect modes in the game control device 100 in this way, for example, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time reduction fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time reduction variation count update process (A5027) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the time reduction variation count update process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability (high probability state) is in progress (A5301). If the special figure high probability is in progress (result of A5301 is “Y”), the time shortening variation frequency update process ends.

  In addition, when the special figure high probability is not present (the result of A5301 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure time reduction (time reduction state) is being performed (A5302). If it is not during the special figure time reduction (result of A5302 is “N”), the time reduction variation number update processing is ended.

  In addition, when the special figure time reduction is being performed (the result of A5302 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the time reduction fluctuation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be the time reduction state by −1. Then (A5303), it is determined whether or not the number of times of time shortening fluctuation has become 0 (A5304). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5304 is "N"), that is, if the time reduction state continues even in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the time reduction fluctuation number update processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of the time shortening change is 0 (the result of A5304 is “Y”), that is, when the time saving state ends in the current special figure change display game, the game control device 100 sets the probability information command ( (Time saving end) is prepared (A5305), and a command setting process is executed (A5306). Thereafter, the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction) is executed (A5307), and the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 2 (at the end of working hours)]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction) is executed in step A5307 in the time reduction change frequency update process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the working hours in the external information output data area (A5401) and the test signal output data area (A5402). Further, the low-probability number is saved in the gaming state display number area (A5403), and the ordinary figure low probability & ordinary power no support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (A5404).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5405). Finally, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5406), and then the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (at the end of the working hours) is ended.

  Here, the type of special result and the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening (special variable winning device) in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

  As the types of special results, four types of 2R probability change, 11R probability change, 11R normal, and 16R probability change are set. The 2R probable change, the 11R probable change, and the 16R probable change have the number of rounds in the special game state being 2, 11, 16 rounds, respectively. It is a special result that is reduced to a time saving state. Normally, the number of rounds in the special game state is 11 rounds, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the normal probability state, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) of the special figure change display game. Is a special result that is reduced to a time-saving state until the execution.

  Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a lower winning prize port (first special variable prize device 38) and an upper winning prize port (second special variable prize device 39), and a plurality of opening and closing patterns are prepared for each. . Then, one open / close pattern is selected from the plurality of open / close patterns according to the type of the special result. In the following opening and closing pattern, the value indicated as the opening time of the special winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the special winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round. Closes the special winning opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of the upper winning award (the second special variable winning device 39) according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The upper winning award opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 51A is selected when the special result is the 2R certainty change and the time is not reduced when the special result is derived. In the upper winning award opening / closing pattern 1, an opening time of 52 ms is set in the first round (1R), and an opening time of 52 ms is set in the next round (2R) after an interval time of 1448 ms. Then, after the ending time of 22400 ms has elapsed, the special game state ends.

  The upper winning award opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 51 (b) is selected when the special result is 2R-probable and the time is reduced when the special result is derived. The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing mode as the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern, but has an ending time of 1400 ms.

  The upper winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 51 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results with 16R certainty. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, 16 rounds in which a 52 ms opening time is set with an interval time of 1448 ms are performed, and the special game state ends after the ending time of 1400 ms.

  The upper winning award opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 51D is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R certain. In the upper-winning winning opening / closing pattern 4, first, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is performed 16 times with a closing time of 1448 ms as in the upper-winning opening / closing pattern 3. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which opening / closing pattern.

  Thereafter, during the closing time of 6300 ms, the promotion image is displayed on the display device 41 to notify that it is the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4, and the opening of 26168 ms is performed to finish the first round. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms, the special game state ends.

  The upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 51E is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R certain. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), the opening is performed for 52 ms first, then the opening is performed for 26948 ms with the closing time of 5948 ms therebetween, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms, the special game state ends.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of the lower big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 52 (a) is selected when the special result is the 11R probability change or the 11R normal. In the lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), first, 200 ms is opened, and then 28000 ms is opened with a closing time of 5800 ms therebetween, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms therebetween is repeated 10 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms, the special game state ends.

  The lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 52 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results with 16R certainty. Until the end of the eleventh round, the opening and closing pattern 2 is the same as that of the opening and closing patterns 1 and 3 for the lower winning opening, and the effect on the display device 41 and the like is the same. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the pattern is a pattern. After the eleventh round, the round in which the opening time of 200 ms is set with the interval time of 1500 ms therebetween is repeated five times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms, the special game state ends.

  The lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 52 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results with 16R certainty. Until the end of the 11th round, the opening and closing pattern 3 is the same as that of the opening and closing patterns 1 and 2, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the pattern is a pattern. Then, after the end of the eleventh round, the promotion image is displayed on the display device 41 at the interval time of 13000 ms to notify that it is the lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 3. Thereafter, a round in which the opening time of 27000 ms is set is repeated five times with an interval time of 2000 ms, and after the ending time of 6000 ms, the special game state ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2612) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. FIGS. 53A and 53B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the special game state by +1 (A5501), and determines whether or not the special winning opening information is the opening and closing patterns 1 to 3 of the special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). Is determined (A5502).

  When the special winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (the result of A5502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3. (S (start value), E (end value)) are set (A5509), and the flow shifts to the process of step A5520 (FIG. 53B).

  By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, the opening and closing of the special winning opening in one round and the time thereof can be set based on the special winning opening control table. In the case of the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images is displayed not from every round but from the start to the end of the special game state. The round command corresponding to the number is not transmitted.

  If the special winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (result of A5502 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. (A5503), and executes a command setting process (A5504).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the started round is the first round (1R) (A5505). If it is the first round (result of A5505 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening information is a lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) opening / closing pattern (A5506). ).

  If the special winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (the result of A5506 is “Y”), the game control device 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern. (S, E) is set (A5510), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  In addition, when the special winning opening information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (the result of A5506 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the special winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4. It is determined whether or not it is (A5507).

  When the special winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (the result of A5507 is “Y”), the game control device 100 corresponds to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4. The control pointer (S, E) is set (A5508), and the flow shifts to the process of step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  When the special winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (result of A5507 is “N”), the game control device 100 corresponds to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5. A control pointer (S, E) to be set is set (A5511), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

On the other hand, when the round to be started is not the first round (1R) (result of A5505 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the round to be started is 2 to 11 rounds ( A5512). If the rounds to be started are rounds 2 to 11 (result of A5512 is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the special winning opening opening information is the upper special winning opening opening / closing pattern (A5513).

  Then, when the special winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern (the result of A5513 is “N”), the game control device 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the 2nd to 11th rounds of the lower winning opening / closing pattern. (S, E) is set (A5514), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  In addition, when the special winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (the result of A5513 is “Y”), the game control device 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the second round or later of the upper winning opening / closing pattern. (S, E) is set (A5515), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  When the round to be started is not round 2 to 11 (result of A5512 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening opening information is the upper special winning opening opening / closing pattern. (A5516). If the special winning opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (result of A5516 is “Y”), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the second round or later of the upper winning opening / closing pattern is set. This is set (A5515), and the flow shifts to the process of step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  If the special winning opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern (the result of A5516 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the special winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening / closing pattern 2. It is determined whether or not it is (A5517).

  If the special winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (the result of A5517 is “Y”), the game control device 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the 12th round or later of the lower winning opening / closing pattern 2. (S, E) is set (A5518), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  When the special winning opening opening information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (the result of A5517 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs control corresponding to the lower 12 winning opening / closing pattern 3 after the 12th round. The pointer (S, E) is set (A5519), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  When the control pointer of the special winning opening opening / closing pattern is set (A5509, A5510, A5511, A5514, A5515, A5519), the game control device 100 saves the start value (S) of the control pointer in the large hit control pointer area ( A5520), the end value (E) is saved in the large hit control pointer upper limit area (A5521). Subsequently, a solenoid information setting process is executed (A5522). The details of the solenoid information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening opening information is a lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (A5523). When the special winning opening opening information is the lower special winning opening opening / closing pattern (result of A5523 is “Y”), the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5524), and the fanfare / interval process is executed. finish. The details of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the special winning opening opening information is not the lower special winning opening opening / closing pattern (the result of A5523 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 executes the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 (A5).
525), end the fanfare / interval processing. The details of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. By the above processing, one of the open / close patterns shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 is set.

[Solenoid information setting processing]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the solenoid information setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.
The solenoid information setting processing is executed in step A5522 in the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG.

  First, the gaming control device 100 sets a special winning opening control address table (A5601), and acquires an address of the special winning opening control table corresponding to the mid-big hit control pointer (A5602).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires the output data and saves it in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5603). Finally, acquires the opening / closing time value and saves the special figure game processing timer area (A5604). The solenoid information setting process ends. By this processing, opening and closing of the special winning opening and the time thereof are set.

[Grand Winner Opening Process Shift Setting Process 1]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1 is executed in step A5524 in the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to “4” relating to the special winning opening process (A5701), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5702). After that, a signal relating to the start of opening the lower winning port is saved in the test signal output data area (A5703), and the information in the special winning port count number area for storing the number of winnings to the higher winning port is cleared (A5704). Finally, the lower winning opening control flag is saved in the winning opening determination flag area (A5705), and the processing shift setting process 1 during opening of the winning opening is ended.

[Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 is executed in step A5525 in the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to “4” relating to the special winning opening process (A5801), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5802). After that, a signal relating to the start of opening of the big winning port is saved in the test signal output data area (A5803), and information in the big winning port count number area for storing the number of winnings to the big winning port is cleared (A5804). Finally, the upper winning opening control flag is saved in the special winning opening determination flag area (A5805), and the processing shift setting process 2 during opening of the special winning opening is ended.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, the details of the special winning opening processing (A2613) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during opening of the special winning opening according to the present embodiment.

The game control device 100 first updates the control pointer during the big hit by +1 (A5901), and further determines whether or not the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit area (A5).
902).

  When the value of the control pointer has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit area (the result of A5902 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes a solenoid information setting process (A5909, see FIG. 54). As a result, the opening and closing mode of the special winning opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening opening process shift setting process 3 (A5910), and ends the special winning opening opening process.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing transition setting processing)
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning port remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the present embodiment. The special winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting processing is executed in step A5908 in the special winning opening opening processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to “5” related to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A6001), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6002). Thereafter, the special winning game remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6003).

  Then, in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 or the movable member 39c of the second special fluctuation winning device 39, the game control device 100 turns off the special winning opening solenoid 38b or 39b. The data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6004), and thereafter, the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing ends.

[Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process 3]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 3 of the present embodiment. The special winning opening opening process shift setting process 3 is executed in step A5910 in the special winning opening process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 sets the processing number to “4” relating to the processing during opening of the special winning opening (A6101). Then, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A6102), and thereafter, the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 3 ends.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
Next, the details of the special winning port remaining ball processing (A2614) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the winning prize hole remaining ball processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The game control device 100 first compares the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether or not the current round is the last round. (A6201).

  If the current round in the special game state is not the last round (the result of A6201 is “N”), the game control device 100 maps the current round number and the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information. It is saved in the game processing timer area (A6202). Further, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is executed (A6203), and the special winning port remaining ball processing ends. The details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

As the interval time, a time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms in the case of the upper winning opening and closing patterns 1 to 3) is set. The interval period between the rounds is the period from the end of the round when the winning prize opening ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the lapse of the winning prize opening ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper winning award winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, the time is 1448 ms.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the last round (the result of A6201 is “Y”), the special control game mode stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. The game mode flag is loaded from the flag save area (A6204). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6205). Then, the big hit end process shift setting process is executed (A6206), and the big winning opening remaining ball process ends. The details of the big hit end processing shift setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  During the ending period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state, the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the last round, and the ending time elapses from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. Until the time elapses.

  For example, when the special result is a 2R probability change and the special result is not in the time saving state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the effect mode selected in a mode other than the time saving state at the time of deriving the special result, the upper winning opening opening / closing selected In the case of pattern 1, the ending time is set to 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 22,400 ms including the 1380 ms spent as the special winning port remaining ball processing time before the ending time, and during this ending period, the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 or the like.

  In addition, when the special result is 2R probability change and the special result is in the time saving state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the effect mode selected in the time saving state at the time of deriving the special result, the upper winning opening opening and closing is selected. For pattern 2, the ending time is set to 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 1400 ms including the 1380 ms spent as the special winning port remaining ball processing time before the ending time.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is executed in step A6203 in the special winning port remaining ball processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval process (A6301), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6302).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the opening end of the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) in the test signal output data area (A6303), and the upper special winning opening (second special variable winning). A signal relating to the end of opening of the device 39) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6304). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (A6305), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.

[Big hit end process shift setting process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The big hit end processing shift setting processing is executed in step A6206 in the big winning port remaining ball processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “6” as the process number for the big hit end process (A6401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6402). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the opening of the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6403), and the signal relating to the end of opening of the upper special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is saved. The signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (A6405) and clears the information of the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state. (A6406). Further, the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (A6407).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number (A6408), and stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening. The information in the mouth opening information area is cleared (A6409).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big hit port (A6410), and stores the big hit medium control pointer upper limit area in which the end value of the big hit control pointer is stored. Is cleared (A6411). Finally, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (A6412), and the big hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end processing (A2615) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit end processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that has triggered the execution of the current special game state when the special game state is set to the high probability state after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high probability data (A6501).

  If the data is not high-probability data (result of A6501 is “N”), game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting processing 1 (A6502). Details of the big hit end setting process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the data is high-probability data (the result of A6501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end setting process 2 (A6503). Details of the big hit end setting process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big hit end setting process 1 or the big hit end setting process 2 ends, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (A6504) and executes the command setting process (A6505). .

  Next, a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100 is executed. Specifically, the game control device 100 first sets an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A6506). Then, by referring to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (A6507).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires the effect remaining rotation speed in the effect mode set after the end of the special game state, and saves it in the effect remaining rotation speed area (A6508). Further, the next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (A6509).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (A6510). Subsequently, the prepared command is saved in the effect mode command area (A6511), and a command setting process is executed (A6512). Finally, the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 is executed (A6513), and the big hit end process ends. Details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The big hit end setting process 1 is executed in step A6502 in the big hit end process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (A6601), and further saves a signal relating to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (A6602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the general figure high probability & general electric power support flag in the general figure game mode flag area (A6603), and further saves the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area. (A6604).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (time saving) in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A6605), and further saves the time reduction fluctuation frequency initial value (for example, 70) in the time reduction fluctuation frequency area. (A6606). After that, the big hit end setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variable display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting an initial value (for example, 70) of the number of time saving changes in the number of time saving changes area, the time saving state ends by executing the special figure change display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The big hit end setting process 2 is executed in step A6503 in the big hit end process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the high probability in the external information output data area (A6701), and further saves a signal related to the start of the high probability to the test signal output data area (A6702).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the general figure high probability & general electric power support flag in the general figure game mode flag area (A6703), and further saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area. (A6704).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (high probability) in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A6705), and clears the time reduction fluctuation frequency area (A6706). Then, the big hit end setting process 2 ends.

With the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variable display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state is reached until the next special result mode is derived. That is, the specific game state in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period during which the normal variable prize device 37 is opened is extended for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. It constitutes state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 is executed in step A6513 in the big hit end process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as a process number related to a special figure ordinary process (A6801), and saves the process number in a special figure game process number area (A6802).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the big hit in the external information output data area (A6803), and further saves a signal relating to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6804). Subsequently, the information of the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (A6805), and further, the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (A6806).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the number during the time reduction in the gaming state display number area (A6807), and saves the flag during the illegal monitoring period in the lower large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (A6808). Finally, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6809), and the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 is ended.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the general-purpose game process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure variation display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A6901). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A6902). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 unless the general-purpose game processing timer is 0 (A6903). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become 0 (A6904).

  If the value of the general game processing timer is 0 (the result of A6904 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time has already elapsed, the game control device 100 sets A general-purpose game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A6905).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A6906). Then, after returning the return address after the completion of the branch processing to the stack area (A6907), the processing branches according to the game processing number (A6908).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A6908, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the variation of the general-purpose variation display game, and sets the start of the variation of the general-purpose variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the like. The regular figure ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the regular figure change processing is executed (A6909). Details of the ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the game processing number is “1” in step A6908, the game control device 100 executes a general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A6910). The details of the process during the ordinary figure change will be described later with reference to FIG. 73A.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A6908, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time-saving state is set if the result of the normal-floor display game is a hit. The general-figure display process is executed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the general-floor process (A6911). Details of the processing during the ordinary figure display will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “3” in step A6908, the game control device 100 performs continuation of the process during the ordinary drawing, or setting of information necessary for performing the ordinary sphere processing. The middle processing per figure is executed (A6912). The details of the normal drawing hit processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the game processing number is “4” in step A6908, the game control device 100 executes a general electric remaining sphere process for setting information necessary for performing a general map end process (A6913). ). Details of the ordinary figure remaining sphere processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78A.

  When the game processing number is “5” in step A6908, the game control device 100 executes a general figure end processing for setting information necessary for performing the general figure ordinary processing (A6909). (A6914). The details of the ordinary drawing end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 79A.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a general figure change control table for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol by the general figure display 53 (A6915). Thereafter, a symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A6916), and the ordinary symbol game process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A6904 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A6915 and thereafter.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A6901 in the general-purpose game process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7001). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7001 is "Y"), the number of ordinary figure reservations is acquired and it is determined whether the number of ordinary figure reservations is less than the upper limit (A7002). .

  When the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of ordinary drawing reservations by +1 (A7003), and corresponds to the updated number of ordinary drawing reservations. The address of the random number storage area to be calculated is calculated (A7004). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A7005), and the gate switch monitoring process ends.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7001 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (result of A7002 is " N "), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general-purpose winning switch monitoring process (A6902) in the general-purpose game process described above will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal winning switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the game is hitting the normal figure, that is, whether or not the normal figure change display game is in the hit state and the normal change winning device 37 is executing the predetermined number of opening operations. (A7101). Then, in the case where a normal drawing is being performed (the result of A7101 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7102). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (result of A7102 is "Y"), the count of the ordinary power counter is updated by +1 (A7103).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated count number of the ordinary power counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 9) (A7104). When the counted number reaches the upper limit value (result of A7104 is “Y”), the pointer (the value of the end of hit) is loaded from the control pointer upper limit value area during the ordinary drawing (A7105).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the loaded pointer in the control pointer area during normal drawing (A7106). Finally, the general-purpose game process timer is cleared (A7107), and the general-purpose winning switch monitoring process ends. In other words, if there is a general winning of a prize equal to or greater than the upper limit value in the hit state of the normal figure, the value of the hit end is saved in the normal figure hitting process control pointer area at that time, and To end.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a when it is determined that it is not in the normal drawing (the result of A7101 is “N”) (the result of A7102 is “N”). ) Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (result of A7104 is “N”), the normal power winning switch monitoring process ends.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (A6909) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the routine of ordinary processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of ordinary drawing reservations is 0 (A7201). If the number of ordinary figure reservations is 0 (result of A7201 is “Y”), ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 is executed (A7222), and ordinary figure ordinary processing ends. Note that the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the reserved number of ordinary maps is not 0 (the result of A7201 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads a winning random number from the random number per ordinary diagram storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM (A7202). ). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the probability of a winning result in the normal-floor variation display game is a high-figure high probability that is higher than usual, that is, whether or not the time saving state is set (A7203).

  If the game control device 100 is not at the time of the general figure high probability (the result of A7203 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of the general figure low probability. Is determined (A7204).

  When the value of the winning random number does not match the low probability determination value (the result of A7204 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the winning flag area (A7205). Further, a slip stop symbol number is set for the normal symbol stop symbol (A7206), and the random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) per normal symbol is cleared to 0 (A7211).

  On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number matches the low probability determination value (the result of A7204 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (A7209). Further, a stop symbol number is set for the normal symbol stop symbol (A7210), and the random number storage area for normal symbol (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (A7219).

  In addition, when the game control device 100 is at the time of the general figure high probability (the result of A7203 is “Y”), the value of the winning random number is the lower limit value of the plurality of continuous determination values used at the time of the general figure high probability. It is determined whether it is less than a certain high probability lower limit determination value (A7207).

  In addition, when the value of the winning random number is not less than the high probability lower limit determination value (the result of A7207 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the value of the winning random number is a plurality of consecutive determination values used at the time of ordinary high probability. (A7208).

  If the value of the winning random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (the result of A7208 is “N”), that is, if it is a winning, the gaming control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7209). ). Further, a stop symbol number is set for the normal symbol stop symbol (A7210), and the random number storage area for normal symbol (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (A7211).

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the winning random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value (the result of A7207 is “Y”), or that the value of the winning random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7208 is "Y"), that is, in the case of a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (A7205). Then, a slip stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol (A7206), and the random number storage area per normal symbol (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (A7211). In other words, the judgment value for judging the hit of the general figure by the coincidence of the hit random numbers is one value at the time of the low probability of the normal figure, and is a plurality of continuous values at the time of the high probability of the general figure.

  When the stop symbol number is set in the normal symbol stop symbol, the game control device 100 clears the random number storage area per normal symbol (for 1 reserved number) to 0 (A7211), and stores the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area. Save (A7212). Then, it prepares a decorative pattern change pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol (A7213), and executes a command setting process (A7214). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the ordinary figure change display game on the display device 41 or the like.

  After that, the game control device 100 shifts the random number storage area per ordinary figure (A7215), clears the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A7216), and updates the reserved number of ordinary figure by -1 (A7217).

In other words, with the execution of the general-figure variation display game relating to the oldest general-family reservation number 1, the ranks of the general-family reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the general-family reservation number 1 are moved up by one. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 of ordinary figure reservation in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the number of ordinary figure reservation is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during normal power support (during a time-saving state) (A7218). If the service is not being supported (“N” in A7218), a fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) when no service is supported is set (A7219). In addition, when the normal power support is being performed (result of A7218 is “Y”), the normal time fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) during the normal power support is set (A7220). Then, after the normal figure fluctuation time is set, the normal figure fluctuation processing shift setting processing is executed (A7221), and the normal figure normal processing ends. Note that the normal-fluctuating process shift setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a general-purpose ordinary process shift setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The general-purpose ordinary process shift setting process 1 is executed in step A7222 in the general-purpose ordinary process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as a process number for transitioning to a normal map normal process (A7301), and saves the process number in a normal map game process number area (A7302). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the regular telephone irregularity monitoring period flag area (A7303), and the ordinary figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 is terminated.

[Process shift setting process during normal fluctuation]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure fluctuation according to the first embodiment of this invention. The normal figure change process transition setting processing is executed in step A7221 in the normal figure normal processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the process number for shifting to the process of changing the general figure (A7401), and saves the process number in the general figure game process number area (A7402).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the general-float display game in the test signal output data area (A7403), and sets a fluctuating flag indicating that the general-figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating. The data is saved in the control flag area (A7404). Then, the flash control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the flash cycle timer of the general-purpose display, is saved in the general-purpose flash control timer area (A7405). finish.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general figure change processing (A6910) in the general figure game processing will be described. FIG. 73A is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the process during the ordinary figure fluctuation according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the ordinary figure changing process, the game control device 100 executes an ordinary figure displaying process shift setting process (A7501).

  FIG. 73B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the general-middle-diagram display process shift setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to “2” (A7511) as a setting process for shifting to the process of displaying the general map, and saves the process number in the general game process number area (A7512).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a general-purpose display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is a display time of the result of the general-purpose variation display game on the general-purpose display device (A7513), and sets the general-purpose display time to It is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A7514).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the change in the ordinary figure in the test signal output data area (A7515). Then, a stop flag indicating that the general-figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the general-figure variation control flag area (A7516), and the general-figure display process shift setting processing ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general figure display processing (A6911) in the aforementioned general figure game processing will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during the ordinary figure display according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 loads the hit flag (hit information or out-of-office information) set in the normal processing and the normal processing (A7601), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A7602). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A7603).

  When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (the result of A7603 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a normal figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 (FIG. 71) for shifting to the normal figure ordinary process. Is executed (A7612), and the process for displaying the ordinary map ends.

  On the other hand, when the hit information is set in the hit flag (the result of A7603 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the normal power support (during the time saving state) (A7604). ).

  Then, when the normal power support is not being performed (the result of A7604 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the normal power release time (for example, 100 ms) without the normal power support in the general game processing timer area. (A7605). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no general power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal power hit (A7606), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) without the general power support is saved. It is saved in the hit control pointer upper limit area (A7607).

  Through the above processing, the opening mode of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 during the normal operation state is set, and for example, the opening can be performed twice. After that, the game control device 100 executes a normal-drawing-per-middle-period process shift setting process (A7611), and ends the normal-figure-displaying process. It should be noted that details of the normal-middle-period process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the normal power support is being performed (the result of A7604 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the normal power release time (for example, 1352 ms) during the normal power support in the normal game processing timer area. (A7608). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal time (A7609), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is set at the normal time. It is saved in the control pointer upper limit value area (A7610).

  With the above processing, the opening mode of the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 during the time saving state is set, and for example, the opening can be performed four times. After that, the game control device 100 executes a normal-drawing-per-middle-period process shift setting process (A7611), and ends the normal-figure-displaying process.

[Middle-time process shift setting process]
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process-setting-for-medium-time-period transition according to the first embodiment of this invention. The process of setting a transition to a normal figure per process is executed in step A7611 in the general figure displaying middle process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets "3" as a process number for shifting to the normal-per-game process (A7701), and saves the process number in the general-purpose game process number area (A7702). After that, a signal relating to the hit of the normal figure change display game and a signal relating to the start of the normal power operation are saved in the test signal output data area (A7703). Further, the ON data is saved in a general-purpose solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general-purpose solenoid (A7704).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information of the ordinary number counting region where the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is stored (A7705), and determines the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 during the illegal unauthorized monitoring period. The information on the stored number of illegally won prizes is cleared (A7706). Finally, a flag that defines the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is saved in the general telephone fraud monitoring period flag area (A7707), and the process shift setting process during regular drawing is completed.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the mid-summer-time per-figure processing (A6912) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the routine hitting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal figure hit (A7801), and the loaded value of the control pointer during the normal figure hits the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal figure (hit end). Is determined (A7802).

  Then, when the value of the control pointer during the ordinary figure does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the ordinary figure (the result of A7802 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the control during the ordinary figure. The pointer is updated by +1 (A7803). Further, the normal power operation shift setting process is executed (A7804), and the normal time hitting process is terminated. The details of the normal power operation shift setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the value of the control pointer during the ordinary figure reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the ordinary figure (the value of the end of the collision) (the result of A7802 is “Y”), Without performing the process of updating (+1) the control pointer area during the ordinary drawing operation in step A7803, the ordinary power operation transition setting process is executed (A7804), and the ordinary processing during the ordinary drawing operation ends.

(Privilege operation transition setting process)
Next, the details of the ordinary power operation shift setting processing (A7804) in the above-described ordinary figure hitting processing will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ordinary power operation shift setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A7901). If the value of the control pointer is any one of 0, 3, 5, and 7, the flow shifts to the process of step A7902 to control the closing of the normal variable prize device 37, so that the normal variable prize corresponding to the control pointer is set. Wait time after the device 37 is closed (for example, 2800 ms or 1000
ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A7902).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c (A7903), and ends the general-purpose operation shift setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is one of 1, 4, 6, and 8, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A7904 and controls the opening of the normal variable winning device 37. The general power open time (for example, any of 100 ms, 5200 ms, and 1352 ms), which is the open time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A7904). Further, in order to turn on the general-purpose solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (A7905), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

  Further, when the value of the control pointer is any one of 2 and 9, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A7906, ends the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37, and performs the ordinary electric ball processing ( In order to execute A6913), "4" is set as the process number (A7906), and the process number is saved in the general-purpose game process number area (A7907).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the ordinary electric ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) in the ordinary game processing timer area (A7908). After that, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to set the general-purpose solenoid 37c to off (A7909), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

(Puden residual sphere treatment)
Next, the details of the ordinary power remaining sphere process (A6913) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 78A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the ordinary electric remaining sphere processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the ordinary power remaining sphere processing, the game control device 100 executes an ordinary figure end processing transition setting processing (A8001).

  FIG. 78B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the general-purpose hit end processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a processing number “5” relating to the end processing per ordinary figure (A8011), and saves the processing number in the ordinary figure game processing number area (A8012). After that, the general figure ending time is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (A8013).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the test signal output data area (A8014). Subsequently, the normal telephone count number area for counting the number of wins to the ordinary variable prize device 37 is cleared (A8015), and further, the middle control pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A8016). After that, the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal time per hit is cleared (A8017), and the normal time per hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[End processing per map]
Next, the details of the perpetual figure end processing (A6914) in the aforementioned perpetual figure game processing will be described. FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the per-figure end processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the per-figure end processing, the game control device 100 executes a per-figure normal processing shift setting processing 2 (A8101).

FIG. 79B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a general-purpose ordinary process shift setting process 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a processing number “0” related to the ordinary figure ordinary processing (A8111), and further saves the processing number in the ordinary figure game processing number area (A8112). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game is saved in the test signal output data area (A8113).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 in the flag area for monitoring the fraudulent fraud (A8114). The setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1310) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the segment LED editing process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the general figure hold display 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided on the collective display device 50 are provided. The setting related to the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the section 58, the third game state display section 59, and the round display section 60 is performed.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a table of the number of the reserved figure in which the display form on the regular figure reservation display is defined (A8201), acquires display data corresponding to the number of reserved figure, and displays the regular figure reservation display. Is saved in the segment area of the container (A8202). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold display is defined (A8203), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. (A8204).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 reservation number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 reservation display is defined (A8205), acquires display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number, and acquires the special data. The data is saved in the segment area of the reservation display in FIG. 2 (A8206). Further, a round display LED display table defining a display mode on the round display unit is set (A8207), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (A8208). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a game state display table in which display modes on the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined (A8209). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is obtained and saved in the segment area of each game state display section (A8210).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the high probability notification flag relating to the notification that the large hit probability state is in the high probability state at the time of restoration from the power failure is on (A8211). If the high-probability notification flag is on (the result of A8211 is “Y”), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process ends.

  When the high-probability notification flag is not on (the result of A8211 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the high-probability notification LED off data in the segment area of the third game state display unit 59 ( A8212), the segment LED editing process ends.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring processing performed in the magnet / radio fraud monitoring processing (A1311) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not the state is that magnetism has been detected (A8301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A8301 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 100 sets the magnet irregularity monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. It is updated (A8302), and it is determined whether or not the timer has expired (A8303).

  The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the time of the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (the result of A8303 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A8304), the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A8305).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a command for magnet impropriety notification (A8306), and prepares a magnet improper occurrence flag as a magnet improper flag (A8307). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A8313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (the result of A8301 is “N”), that is, when an abnormal magnetism is not detected, the game control device 100 clears the magnet illegal monitoring timer. (A8308). Then, if the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A8309). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A8310). Even when the timer of the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of A8303 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A8309.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A8310 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the magnet fraudulent notification timer is 0 (the result of A8310 is “Y”), that is, that the time has expired or that the time has already expired, Is completed, or if the fraudulent notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command to end magnet fraudulent notification is prepared (A8311).

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet illegal release flag as a magnet illegal flag (A8312), and determines whether or not the prepared magnet illegal flag matches the value of the magnet illegal flag area (A8313).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A8313 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (result of A8313 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (A8314).
), And executes a command setting process (A8315). After that, the magnet illegal monitoring process ends.

(Radio fraud monitoring processing)
Next, the details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the radio wave fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a, that is, It is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (A8401). When the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A8401 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (A8402).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a command for radio wave fraud notification (A8403), and prepares a radio wave fraud flag as a radio wave fraud flag (A8404). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (A8409). In other words, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected, unlike the case of magnetic fraud.

  On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A8401 is “N”), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 If is not 0, -1 is updated (A8405). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A8406). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A8406 is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the radio wave fraud monitoring process ends.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A8406 is “Y”), that is, that the time has expired or that the time has already expired, Is completed, or when the fraudulent notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command to end radio wave fraudulent notification is prepared (A8407). Further, a radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (A8408), and it is determined whether the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (A8409).

  Then, when the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A8409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the radio wave fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A8409 is "N"), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (A8410), and a command setting process is executed (A8411). Thereafter, the radio wave fraud monitoring process ends.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1313) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the external information editing process, information is collected based on monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (A1304), the winning port switch / status monitoring process (A1307), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1311), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1312). A process of creating information to be output to an external device such as a terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A8501). Details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start-up signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the start-up opening (A8502). The details of the opening signal editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 unless the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game is 0 (A8503). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A8504). When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (the result of A8504 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is output to the external information output data. The data is saved in the area (A8505).

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is not 0 (the result of A8504 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 outputs the ON data of the symbol determination number signal to the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (A8506).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state. Specifically, the game control device 100 first sets a security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like to 0. If not, -1 is updated (A8507). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (A8508). If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (result of A8508 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A8518). Finally, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A8519), and the external information editing processing ends. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A8508 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control device 100 It is determined whether or not it has occurred (A8509 to A8515).

  Specifically, the game control device 100 generates a glass frame opening error (A8509), a front frame opening error (A8510), an illegal lower winning opening (A8511), an illegal upper winning opening (A8512), and an illegal occurrence of a regular telephone. (A8513), it is determined whether magnet fraud (A8514) or radio wave fraud (A8515) is occurring.

The game control device 100 determines that the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A8509 is “Y”), the front frame opening error is occurring (the result of A8510 is “Y”), and the lower large winning opening illegal is occurring (A8511). The result is “Y”), the winning prize mouth fraud is occurring (the result of A8512 is “Y”), the illegal fraud is occurring (the result of A8513 is “Y”), and the magnet is fraudulent (the result of A8514 is “Y”). )) Or during the occurrence of radio wave fraud (result of A8515 is “Y”), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A8518). Further, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A8519), and the external information editing processing ends. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A8508 is “Y”) and no error or fraud has occurred (from A8509), The result of A8515 is “N”), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A8516). Thereafter, the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A8517), and the external information editing processing ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A8501) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal, which is generated each time the number of prize balls (planned number of payouts) generated due to winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10), to an external device. Processing.

  First, unless the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A8601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A8602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (result of A8602 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is 0. (A8603).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A8603 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by −1 (A8604), and outputs the main prize ball signal output. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the control timer area (A8605). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the ON state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the OFF state (eg, low level). (For example, 192 ms).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8607), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. If the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (result of A8603 is “Y”), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A8608), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section. Is determined (A8606). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (the result of A8606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs on data for turning the main prize ball signal to the ON state by RWM.
Is saved in the external information output data area (A8607). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (result of A8606 is "N"), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is output to the external information output data of the RWM. The data is saved in the area (A8608), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

(Start port signal editing process)
Next, the details of the opening signal editing process (A8502) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the start-up port signal editing process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The starting port signal editing process is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first updates -1 unless the start port signal output control timer is 0 (A8701). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the starting port signal output control timer is 0 (A8702).

  When the value of the starting port signal output control timer is 0 (result of A8702 is “Y”), game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of starting port signal outputs is 0 (A8703). If the start port signal output count is not 0 (result of A8703 is “N”), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (A8704), and the start port signal output control timer area is set to the start port signal output control timer area. The timer initial value is saved (A8705).

  The initial value of the start-up port signal output control timer is a time (for example, 64 ms) obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the on-state (for example, high level) of the start-up signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). , 192 ms).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves ON data for turning on the start-up port signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8707), and ends the start-up port signal editing process.

  When the number of times of starting port signal output is 0 (result of A8703 is “Y”), game control apparatus 100 outputs off data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device to the external information output of RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A8708), and the starting-port signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8702 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section. (A8706). The fact that the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the starting port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON period (result of A8706 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the ON data for turning the start port signal to the ON state in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A8707), and terminates the starting port signal editing process.

  In addition, when the start-up port signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (the result of A8706 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs off data for turning off the start-up port signal for the external device to the RWM. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A8708), and the starting port signal editing process ends.

(Modification of game control)
The control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 of the gaming machine 10 has been described above. The processing executed by the game control device 100 is not limited to the above-described procedure, and includes various modifications. Hereinafter, some modified examples will be described.

[Modification Example 1 of First Embodiment]
In the game control according to the first embodiment of the present invention described above, the processing when an error occurs in the random number generation circuit that generates the big hit random number is not particularly specified. On the other hand, in the first modification, when a predetermined error occurs when a random number is extracted by the random number generation circuit, control is performed such that the corresponding random number is forcibly set to a value disadvantageous to the player.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a timer interrupt process according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. This modification is different from the first embodiment in that a random number circuit monitoring process is executed between step A1304 and step A1305 of the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 9 (A1330). This is different from the first embodiment. The random number circuit monitoring process is a process of monitoring an error occurrence state of the random number generation circuit. The other processing is the same as the timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

[Random number circuit monitoring processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the random number circuit monitoring process according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The random number circuit monitoring processing is executed (A1330) before the random number updating processing (A1305, A1306) of the timer interrupt processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a big hit random number circuit error flag (A9001). As will be described later, the big hit random number circuit error flag is set when an error occurs in the random number generation circuit, and is cleared when the error is eliminated. If there is no big hit random number circuit error flag (the result of A9001 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the random number circuit monitoring process because the random number may be updated as usual.

  On the other hand, when there is a jackpot random number circuit error flag (the result of A9001 is “Y”), the game control device 100 reads the random number error status register (A9002). The random number error status register stores error information relating to the generated random number.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a jackpot random number circuit error has occurred from the value of the random number error status register (A9003). If a jackpot random number circuit error has not occurred (the result of A9003 is “N”), the jackpot random number circuit error counter is cleared to 0 (A9004), and the random number circuit monitoring process ends.

  When a jackpot random number circuit error occurs (the result of A9003 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the jackpot random number circuit error counter by +1 (A9005). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number circuit error counter is 1 (A9006).

  When the jackpot random number circuit error counter is 1 (result of A9006 is “Y”), the game control device 100 resets the jackpot random number circuit (A9010) and waits until restart of the jackpot random number circuit is started (A9010). A9011). After that, the big hit random number circuit is restarted (A9012), and the random number circuit monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot random number circuit error counter is not 1 (the result of A9006 is “N”), the game control device 100 is in a state where the restart has not been completed after the jackpot random number circuit error has occurred. The big hit random number circuit error flag is set (A9007). Further, a jackpot random number circuit error notification command is prepared (A9008), and a command setting process is executed (A9009). Thereafter, the random number circuit monitoring process ends.

  Note that when the effect control device 300 receives the jackpot random number circuit error notification command, the display device 41, a decoration device such as an LED, the speaker 19, and the like notify the occurrence of the jackpot random number circuit error.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
In this modified example, when the big hit random number circuit error flag indicating that the big hit random number circuit error has been generated by the random number circuit monitoring process is set, the big hit random number is replaced with the value at the time of disconnection in the special drawing start port switch common process. .

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a common process for a special-purpose start port switch according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The special figure starting port switch common processing of this modification is different from the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment of the present invention when the big hit random number circuit error flag is set. Is added to the value at the time of disconnection. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  When the game control device 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number in the process of step A2804, it determines whether or not there is a jackpot random number circuit error flag (A2830). Then, if there is a jackpot random number circuit error flag (result of A2830 is “Y”), the loaded jackpot random number is replaced with the value at the time of the loss (A2831). Subsequent processing is the same as the special figure start port switch common processing shown in FIG.

  As described above, if an error occurs in the random number generation circuit when extracting a jackpot random number, by intentionally controlling the corresponding random number to a value disadvantageous to the player, It is possible to prevent an act of generating an error and illegally obtaining a game value.

[Modification Example 2 of First Embodiment]
In the above-described game control according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the fluctuation control timer is updated in the special figure game processing, but in this modification, the fluctuation control timer is updated during the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Will be described.

[Special figure game processing]
FIG. 89A is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure game process in Modification 2 of the first embodiment of the present invention. In the present modified example, the processing relating to the fluctuation control timer and the symbol fluctuation control processing is deleted from the special figure game processing of the first embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. The processing that has not been deleted is the same as the special figure game processing shown in FIG.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, details of the special figure changing process in the present modified example will be described. FIG. 89B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure changing process in Modification 2 of the first embodiment of the present invention. In the special figure changing process in this modification, a process related to the symbol change control process deleted from the special figure game process of this modification shown in FIG. 89A is added. In this modification, the stop extension information is not set.

The game control device 100 first updates -1 unless the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A4851). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A4852). If the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A4852 is “Y”), the special figure display processing transition setting processing is executed (A4806), and the special figure changing processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A4852 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variable symbol determination flag is the special figure 1 variable flag, that is, It is determined whether the special figure change display game is the special figure 1 change display game (A4853).

  If the special figure variable display game being executed is the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4853 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the blink control timer of the first special figure by −1. (A4854), it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time is up (A4855). If the time has not elapsed (the result of A4855 is “N”), the special figure changing process ends.

  When the blink control timer according to the first special figure has timed out (result of A4855 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the blink control timer initial value in the blink control timer area of the first special figure. (A4856). Further, the variable symbol number relating to the first special figure is updated (A4857), and the special figure changing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure variable display game being executed is not the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4853 is “N”), that is, in the case of the special figure 2 variable display game, (2) The blink control timer according to the special map is updated by -1 (A4858). Then, it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time is up (A4859). If the time has not elapsed (the result of A4859 is “N”), the special figure changing process ends.

  When the blink control timer according to the second special figure has timed out (result of A4859 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the initial value of the blink control timer in the blink control timer area of the second special figure. (A4860). Further, the variable symbol number relating to the second special figure is updated (A4861), and the special figure changing process ends.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process in Modification 2 of the first embodiment of the present invention. First, the same processing as steps A8201 to A8212 of the segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 80 is executed, and thereafter, steps A8213 to A8223 added in the present modification are performed. Is performed.

  When the setting of the high-probability notification flag is completed (A8211, A8212), the game control device 100 determines whether the symbol of the first special figure is changing (A8213). If the symbol of the first special figure is changing (the result of A8213 is “Y”), a special figure 1 symbol display table for the change is set (A8214), and the area of the variable symbol number area of the first special figure is set. The display data corresponding to the value is obtained and saved in the segment area of the first special map (A8215). Thereafter, the processing of step A8218 and thereafter is executed.

  On the other hand, when the symbol of the first special figure is not fluctuating (the result of A8213 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 symbol display table for stop (A8216), and sets the first special figure. The display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area in the figure is obtained and saved in the segment area of the first special figure (A8217). Thereafter, the processing of step A8218 and thereafter is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the symbol of the second special figure is changing (A8218). When the symbol of the second special figure is changing (the result of A8218 is “Y”), a special figure 2 symbol display table for the change is set (A8219), and the area of the variable symbol number area of the second special figure is set. The display data corresponding to the value is obtained and saved in the segment area of the second special map (A8222). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the symbol of the second special figure is not fluctuating (the result of A8218 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 symbol display table for stopping (A8221), The display data corresponding to the value of the area of the stop symbol number in the figure is obtained and saved in the segment area of the second special figure (A8222). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process ends.

[Main processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing on the sub side according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is executed by a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311. The main control microcomputer 311 mainly executes this process and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

  The effect control device 300 first prohibits the interrupt (B1001), and after executing the initial settings of the CPU and the VDP, permits the interrupt (B1002, B1003, B1004).

  Next, effect control device 300 permits generation of display data (B1005) and sets a random number seed (B1006). Next, an initial value after power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (B1007).

  Subsequent to the processing at the start of the program from B1001 to B1007, the effect control device 300 executes the loop processing from B1008 to B1021.

  In the loop processing, first, WDT (WatchDogTimer) is cleared (B1008), and an effect button input process for generating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is executed (B1009). In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25, a process for changing the effect content and the like are executed.

  Next, the effect control device 300 sets a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and performs a hall / player setting mode process for accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and the volume of the LED and the liquid crystal. Execute (B1010).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating random numbers for determining details of the change mode of the change display game (B1011), and analyzes and receives commands received from the game control device 100 or the like. A received command check process is performed (B1012). Details of the received command check processing will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a scenario setting process, a motion control process, and an effect display editing process (B1013, B1014, B1015), and sets the preparation end of the drawing command (B1016). In the effect display editing process, the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer by updating various data in accordance with the contents to be drawn. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current time is a frame switching timing (B1017). The effect control device 300 waits until the frame switching timing is reached (result of B1017 is “N”), and when the frame switching timing is reached (result of B1017 is “Y”), it instructs the VDP to draw a screen (B1018). ). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching).

  Next, effect control device 300 performs sound control processing for controlling the output of speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing for controlling the LEDs of board decoration device 46 and frame decoration device 18, and board production device. A movable body control process for controlling the motor and the solenoid at 44 is executed (B1019, B1020, B1021), and the process returns to clearing the WDT (B1008).

[Receive command check processing]
Next, the received command check processing (B1012) in the sub-side main processing will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. This processing is processing for confirming the presence or absence of a received command and analyzing the received command.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received during a frame (1/30 second) as a command reception number (B3001), and the command reception number is 0. It is determined whether it is not (B3002).

  If the number of received commands is 0 (result of B3002 is “N”), effect control device 300 ends this processing. If the number of received commands is not 0, that is, if there is a counter value (result of B3002 is "Y"), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (B3003).

  Next, effect controller 300 copies the contents of the received command buffer into the command area (B3004), and updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (B3005).

  Next, effect controller 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (B3006). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

  If copying of commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (result of B3006 is “N”), effect control device 300 executes processes of B3004 and B3005.

  When copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (result of B3006 is “Y”), effect control device 300 loads the contents of the command area (B3007), and analyzes the received commands to receive them. A command analysis process is performed (B3008). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, effect control device 300 updates the address of the command area (B3009), and determines whether or not analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (B3010). If the analysis has not been completed (result of B3010 is “N”), the processing from B3007 to B3009 is executed until the analysis for the number of receptions is completed. When the analysis is completed (the result of B3010 is “Y”), the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in this processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (B3008) in the received command check processing described above will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process of analyzing a received command.

  The effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the command as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (B3101), and determines whether the MODE is within the normal range (B3102).

  If MODE is in the normal range (result of B3102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not ACT is in the normal range (B3103), and if ACT is also in the normal range. (The result of B3103 is “Y”), and it is determined whether the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (B3104).

  Here, when MODE is not in the normal range (result of B3102 is “N”), when ACT is not in the normal range (result of B3103 is “N”), when ACT for MODE is not correct (result of B3104) Is "N"), the effect control device 300 cannot analyze the command, and thus ends this processing without executing the subsequent processing.

  If the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (result of B3104 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (B3105). The variation commands include a variation pattern command and a stop symbol command.

  If the MODE is within the range of the variation command (the result of B3105 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the variation command processing (B3106), and ends this processing. Details of the variable command processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  If MODE is not within the range of the variable command (result of B3105 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether MODE is within the range of the big hit command (B3107). The big hit commands include a fanfare command, an interval command, and an ending command.

  If MODE is within the range of the big hit command (result of B3107 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes big hit command processing (B3108), and ends this processing.

  When MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related commands (result of B3107 is "N"), effect control device 300 determines whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related commands (B3109).

  When MODE is within the range of the symbol-type command (result of B3109 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes a symbol-type command process (B3110), and ends this process.

When MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (result of B3109 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not MODE is in the range of the one-shot-type command (B31).
11). The one-shot commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a hold number command, a power failure recovery command, a power-on command, a probability information command, an error command, and an RTC command.

  If the MODE is within the range of the one-shot command (the result of B3111 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the one-shot command processing (B3112), and ends this processing.

  If the MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (the result of B3111 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE is within the range of the prefetch command (B3113). The prefetch commands include a prefetch variation pattern command and a prefetch stop symbol command.

  If MODE is within the range of the pre-reading command (result of B3113 is "Y"), effect control device 300 executes pre-reading command processing (B3114), and ends this processing. Details of the prefetch command processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when MODE is not within the range of the pre-reading command (result of B3113 is “N”), effect control device 300 ends this processing without executing any command processing.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the variable command processing (B3106) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process for confirming whether or not the received variable system command has been normally received.

  At first, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type is undetermined from the received variable command (B3201). By this determination, it is possible to check whether the stop symbol command has been received before the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. Since the stop symbol command includes information on the type of the special figure change display game (whether it is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2), if the stop pattern command can be normally received, the special figure change display game is executed. Is determined not to be undecided. If the special figure type is undetermined (result of B3201 is "Y"), the stop control command has not been normally received, and the effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  If the special figure type is not undecided (the result of B3201 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes a fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (B3202). In the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the type (type) of the stop symbol command matches (matches) the variation pattern command. Accordingly, for example, when the type of the fluctuation pattern command does not match the type of the stop symbol command, such as a combination of the fluctuation pattern command of the hit fluctuation and the stop symbol command of the loss symbol, the fluctuation does not occur (specifically, Does not perform the decoration special figure change display game).

  As a result of the determination in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (B3202), if the type of the variation pattern command and the type of the stop symbol command do not match (the result of B3203 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes this process. finish.

When the type of the fluctuation pattern command matches the type of the stop symbol command (result of B3203 is "N"), effect control device 300 executes a fluctuation effect setting process described below (B3204), and executes this process. finish.

(Variable effect setting processing)
FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variable effect setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process of setting a stop symbol or the like based on the received variable system command, and is executed in the above-described variable system command process.

  The effect control device 300 first executes a variation pattern classification process of classifying which variation pattern corresponds to the received variation pattern command (B3301), and clears all the advance notice information areas (B3302).

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a preliminary lottery process during the first half fluctuation (B3303), and determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern by the classification in the fluctuation pattern classification processing (B3301) is roughly classified into the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation without reach. Is determined (B3304). Details of the preliminary lottery process during the first half change will be described with reference to FIG.

  Only when the variation pattern is not roughly classified into the variation pattern of the reachless variation (the result of B3304 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the second-half variation preliminary lottery process (B3305).

  Next, effect control device 300 executes decoration stop symbol setting processing and fluctuation start setting processing (B3306, B3307), and ends this processing.

[Change notice lottery process]
Next, the first-half variation setting process (B3303) in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the preliminary lottery process during the first half change according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the preliminary lottery process during the latter half of the change according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 300 first sets the first-half notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern and the effect mode (B3401), and performs a notice group lottery process of performing a lottery for selecting a notice group of the notice effect at the start of the change. (B3402) is executed. For example, "no notice", "PB (push button) notice", "change notice", "background change notice", "PB notice + change start notice", "PB notice + background change notice", and "change notice" A notice group is selected from "+ background change notice".

  Next, if the result of the lottery in the notice group lottery process (B3402) does not select "no notice", that is, only if there is a notice (the result of B3403 is "N"), the effect control device 300 A detailed lottery process is executed (B3404). The announcement detailed lottery process is a process of performing a lottery for selecting an announcement pattern to appear at the start of the change from the normal announcement patterns included in the announcement group selected in the lottery of B3402.

  Heretofore, for example, when “background change notice” is selected in the lottery in step B3402, a notice pattern to appear is selected from a plurality of types of background change notices, and information on the selected notice pattern fluctuates. It is stored as normal effect information of the start notice effect.

  Next, the effect control device 300 sets the first-half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of the variation pattern and the effect mode (B3405), and performs a notice group lottery process of performing a lottery to select a notice group of the pre-reach notice effect. (B3406) is executed. For example, a notice group is selected from “step-up notice”, “conversation notice”, and “no notice”.

  Next, as a result of the lottery in the notice group lottery process (B3406), if "no notice" is not selected, that is, only if there is a notice (result of B3407 is "N"), the effect control device 300 A detailed lottery process is executed (B3408), and this process ends.

  When "no notice" is selected (result of B3407 is "Y"), effect control device 300 stores information on "no notice" as normal effect information of the pre-reach notice effect, and terminates the process. I do.

  Note that the preliminary lottery process during the latter half change is also the same process as the present process, and a description thereof will be omitted.

[Read-ahead command processing]
Next, the prefetch command processing (B3114) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of prefetch command processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. This processing is performed when the look-ahead variation pattern command and the look-ahead stop symbol command are set in the upper byte (MODE) of the command received by the effect control device 300. Is executed in the above-described received command analysis process.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (B3601). If the special figure type is undetermined (result of B3601 is “Y”), effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  When the special figure type is determined (the result of B3601 is “N”), effect control device 300 executes a fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (B3602).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received look-ahead variation pattern command matches the symbol type based on the determination in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (B3602) (B3603). If the prefetch variation pattern command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B3603 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  When the prefetch variation pattern command matches the symbol type (result of B3603 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current gaming state is non-electric support (B3604).

  When the current gaming state is “non-power support” (result of B3604 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special map type is special map 1 (B3605). If the figure type is not the special figure 1 (the result of B3605 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  If the special figure type is special figure 1 (result of B3605 is “Y”), effect control device 300 is a process of setting whether the display mode of the hold display is the normal mode or the advance mode. The special figure 1 hold notice setting process is executed (B3606). Details of the special figure 1 hold notice setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting a continuous display effect in which a related special effect is performed over a plurality of changes and a mode effect in which a special background display is performed over a plurality of changes as selection. A certain special figure 1 continuous notice setting process is executed (B3607), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is “electric support” (result of B3604 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2 (B3608), When the special figure type is not the special figure 2 (the result of B3608 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  If the special map type is special map 2 (result of B3608 is “Y”), effect control device 300 is a process of setting whether the display mode of the hold display is the normal mode or the advance mode. A special notice 2 reservation notice setting process is executed (B3609).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting a continuous display effect in which a related special effect is performed over a plurality of changes and a mode effect in which a special background display is performed over a plurality of changes as selection. A certain special figure 1 continuous notice setting process is executed (B3610), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, the special drawing 2 is preferentially digested, so that during the non-electric support (normal game state, hiding), the look-ahead to the starting storage (holding storage) of the special figure 1 is performed. Only effects (holding effects, continuous announcements) are set, and during power support, no pre-reading effects for special figure 2 are set. In addition, when the reservation storage of the special figure 1 and the reservation storage of the special figure 2 are digested in the winning order, the prefetch effect for both the reservation memories may be executed. In addition, the pre-reading is executed by the pre-judgment performed by the pre-judgment means before the fluctuation display game of the hold storage is executed.

[Hold icon]
FIG. 99 is a view for explaining a normal system hold icon according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the special system hold icon according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The hold icon 83 is a display of a hold memory (start memory) displayed on the display device 41, for example, is displayed in a circular shape, and a color or a character corresponding to the reliability is displayed by pre-reading (prior determination). In the first embodiment of the present invention, the hold icon 83 includes a normal hold icon for notifying the reliability shown in FIG. 99 and a special hold icon for notifying the development destination and hit as shown in FIG. Can be roughly divided into

  As the normal hold icon, a hold icon 83 that changes to “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow” is prepared in addition to “white” which is a normal hold display. The reliability increases in the order of “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”.

  As the special system suspension icon, a suspension icon 83 that displays “SP” and “SP3” for notifying the development destination is prepared. In addition, "SP" announces that it will evolve (occurs) in Special 1 reach to Special 3 reach, and "SP3" announces that it evolves (occurs) in Special 3 reach. In addition, a hold icon 83 that displays “pierce” and “certain” for predicting the hit as it is is prepared. Note that “sudden” predicts that a sudden change big hit (2R positive change big hit) will occur suddenly, and “sure” predicts that a big hit will occur.

(Game board)
FIG. 101 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In the game board 30 according to the first embodiment, warp entrances 42a are provided on the left and right sides of a center case (game effect structure) 40. In addition, a general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided in the gaming area 32 on the left side, and three general winning openings 35 are provided below the general-purpose starting gate 34. In the present embodiment, left hitting is an advantageous hitting method for the player.

On the inner side of the center case 40, a movable effect member (board effect device) 44, a pair of decorative members 46, a display device 41, and a game ball flowing down the game area 32 are received from above.
A pair of warping devices 42 and a stage 43 are provided to guide the inside of the stage 0. Further, below the warp entrance 42a on the right side and at the edge of the center case 40, a special figure 1 change display LED 66, a special figure 2 change display LED 67, and a general figure change display LED 68 are arranged in this order from the top. The stage 43 extends in the left-right direction at the bottom of the center case 40, and is formed as a corrugated shape having a height at the center. In the central part of the stage 43 and directly above the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36, a game ball rolling the stage 43 is received from the inlet at the upstream end, and directly above the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36. A guide port 43a is formed at the end of the guide channel for guiding the game ball.

  The movable effect member 44 is formed, for example, to imitate the face of an insect, and is movable from the initial position shown in FIG. 101 to the front of the display device 41, that is, downward from the initial position. An LED (not shown) is provided inside, and a light-emitting effect is possible, and the movable part (antenna) 44a can also move up and down.

  The decoration device 46 has a built-in LED (not shown), for example, and is configured to execute a light emission effect at a predetermined timing and to be able to vibrate and move.

  Further, a hold display unit case 500 is provided in a portion indicated by a dotted line. The hold display unit case 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Below the center case 40 and below the game area 32, a special figure 1 starting winning port 36 and a special figure 2 starting winning port 37d are provided. The special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d is configured to be able to win only when the pair of movable pieces (opening / closing member, movable member) 37b is opened, and the pair of movable pieces 37b is used for a normal figure change display game (common figure game). Is opened for a predetermined period of time.

  Below the special figure 2 starting winning port 37d, an attacker type variable winning apparatus 38 is provided. In the variable winning device 38, the opening / closing door 38c is opened for a predetermined number of rounds for a certain period during the special game state, and a prize ball is paid out to the player according to the number of winning balls.

[Hold display unit]
FIG. 102 is a perspective view of the hold display unit case 500. FIG. 102 (A) is a view in which the hold display unit 510 is in the initial position, FIG. 102 (B) is a view in which the hold display unit 510 is in the rendering position, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram in which the 4 hold display unit 511d is opened.

  The hold display unit case 500 is constituted by a base member 501 having a housing space therein, and houses the hold display unit 510 in the housing space. When the hold display unit 510 is in the standby state, as shown in FIG. 102A, the hold display unit 510 is placed in the accommodation space of the hold display unit case 500 that is the initial position (standby position, first position). stand by.

  The front surface of the base member 501 is constituted by a shielding wall portion 502 having a light transmitting lens portion 503. The light transmitting lens unit 503 can emit light (transmit light) by the light of each of the reserved display units 511 (reserved display LEDs 513).

As shown in FIG. 102 (B), the hold display unit 510 includes, for example, four hold display units (mechanical hold storage) 511 that simulate four petals (movable members) 512 that can be mechanically opened and closed. Is established. The hold display unit 511 includes, in order from the left, a first hold display unit 511a, a second hold display unit 511b, a third hold display unit 511c, and a fourth hold display unit 511d. A hold display LED (hold lamp) 513 having a higher brightness than 41 is provided. Note that the hold display unit 510 is a back surface structure (not shown) disposed on the back surface side of the game board.
Attached to.

  The hold display unit case 500 is arranged, for example, so as to face below the display device 41 in a range indicated by a dotted line in FIG. The screen area displayed on the display device 41 includes a fluctuating display area 79 in which a special symbol (identification information) fluctuates, and a standby holding display area 80 in which the start memory is displayed as a holding icon 83. On the left side, a digestion hold display area 88 for displaying the start memory during the execution of the variable display game is provided, and on the right side of the standby hold display area 80, a mode display section 87 indicating a game mode is provided. 102A, the first hold icon 83a, the second hold icon 83b, the third hold icon 83c, and the fourth hold icon 83d indicated by four dotted lines can be displayed in the standby hold display area 80. It is. As described above, the suspension icon 83 can be displayed (changed) as a normal suspension icon or a special suspension icon. If there is no start memory, the hold icon 83 is not displayed.

  Since the display device 41 is located directly above the hold display unit case 500 when viewed from the front, when the hold display unit 510 is in an effect state, the hold display unit 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. It protrudes forward of the standby hold display area 80 of the device 41. Then, the hold display unit 510 shields the standby hold display area 80 of the display device 41 from the player and allows the player to visually recognize the hold display unit 511 included in the hold display unit 510 instead. The hold display unit 510 rises from the initial position to the production position (operating position, second position) when a predetermined condition such as the number of holds is more than 2 and the remaining fluctuation time is longer than a predetermined time is met. It will be in the production state.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (C), the hold display unit 511 allows the petal 512 to be opened (operated), and the expansion of the petal 512 informs the player that the start memory is highly reliable. Notification (mechanical suspension notice) can be made. In addition, from the viewpoint of suppressing the width of the space accommodating the hold display unit 510 in the front-rear direction, when the hold display unit 510 is at the standby position, the petals 512 may be opened, and the petals 512 may be closed after being raised to the production position. .

  Further, even when the hold display unit 510 is at the initial position, the shield display unit 510 may be visible from the front without providing the shielding wall 502. Further, at a position corresponding to the digestion suspension display area 88, a suspension display unit 511 for storing a start-up currently executing the variable display game may be provided.

  As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, separately from the hold icon 83 displayed on the display device 41, the operable hold display unit 510 moves (projects) in front of the hold icon 83 and holds the hold icon 83. The reliability is reported by the hold display unit 511 of the display unit 510.

[Special figure 1 reservation notice setting processing]
Next, the special figure 1 hold advance notice setting process (B3606) in the above-described prefetch command processing will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 hold notice setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 104 is a view for explaining a pending change advance notice determination table 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 104 (A) is a hit pending change advance notice determination table 1, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a determination table 2.

  FIG. 105 is a view for explaining a hold change timing determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 105 (A) is a table 1 used when the hold icon 83 changes to blue, and FIG. FIG. 4C is a diagram illustrating a table 2 used when the hold icon 83 changes to red, and FIG. 4C illustrates a table 3 used when the hold icon 83 changes rainbow, SP, SP3, abrupt, and surely.

  The special figure 1 hold notice setting process is a process for setting whether the display mode of the hold display is the normal form or the notice form, and is executed in the above-described prefetch command processing. The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current number of pending storages is two or more (B3701). Although it is determined whether or not the current number of pending storages is 2 or more, it may be determined whether or not the value is another numerical value or more.

  If the current number of pending storages is 2 or more (result of B3701 is "Y"), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the currently executing fluctuation display game is longer than a predetermined time. A determination is made (B3702).

  If the number of stored memories is not 2 or more (result of B3701 is “N”), or if the remaining fluctuation time is not greater than a predetermined time (result of B3702 is “N”), the mechanical suspension notice is not executed. Therefore, the effect control device 300 sets the final hold icon display information (normal) and the initial hold icon display information (normal), that is, “white without change” in the corresponding hold storage area (B3703).

  Next, effect control device 300 sets information on no change notice on hold and information on no change notice in the corresponding hold storage area (B3704, B3705), and ends this processing. The change suggestion notice is generally called an effect, and is executed by, for example, blurring or blinking the hold icon 83, or blinking the hold display LED 513 for the mechanical hold notice. The effect in the present application is to notify that a display mode such as a luminescent color will change from the displayed mode, and is described as a change suggestion preview effect or simply an effect.

  If the remaining fluctuation time of the currently running variable display game is longer than the predetermined time (the result of B3702 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines that the stop symbol of the currently executing variable display game is a big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (B3706). Here, the result of the variable display game being executed is determined based on whether the stop symbol is a symbol that is a big hit, but may be determined based on whether or not the random number value of the big random number is a big hit.

  When the result is a big hit (result of B3706 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect and a notice mode (a hold display mode after the final change) when the effect is performed. Next, the final mode (final hold icon) of the hold icon 83 is determined based on the “hold change notice determination table 1” shown in FIG. 104 (A) (B3707).

  If the result is not a big hit (result of B3706 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines the final hold icon based on “hold change notice determination table 2” shown in FIG. 104 (B) ( B3708). The pending change announcement determination table 2 has a lower rate of execution of the pending change compared to the pending change announcement determination table 1 and does not display "rainbow", "sudden", or "sure".

  Next, effect control device 300 sets the determined final hold icon information in the corresponding hold storage area (B3709), and determines whether or not the final hold icon is in the notice mode, that is, whether or not it is “other than white”. Is determined (B3710).

  If the final hold icon is in the advance notice mode (result of B3710 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the hold storage to be determined is SP reach (B3711).

If the variation pattern is SP reach (result of B3711 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a hold storage in which mechanical hold advance notice information is set (whether or not mechanical hold advance notice is executed). (B3712, B3713).

  When there is a hold storage in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set (result of B3713 is “Y”), effect control apparatus 300 sets display hold advance notice as a prefetch effect by display device 41 or hold display unit 510. It is determined by lottery whether or not to make a mechanical reservation notice that is a pre-reading effect by (B3714).

  When executing the mechanical suspension advance notice (result of B3715 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 stores the mechanical suspension advance notice information, the initial suspension icon display information (normal), and the change suggestion advance notice information in the corresponding suspension storage area. Are set (B3716, B3717, B3718), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the setting is made so that the mechanical suspension notice is executed only in the case of the SP reach. However, the mechanical suspension notice may be executed other than the SP reach. Further, the setting is made so that the mechanical hold advance notice is executed only when the hold icon 83 is in the advance notice mode (when the hold icon 83 changes). May be executed.

  When the variation pattern is not SP reach (result of B3711 is “N”), when there is no hold storage in which mechanical suspension notice information is set (result of B3713 is “N”), when mechanical suspension notice is not executed (The result of B3715 is “N”), and the production control device 300 sets display suspension notice information in the corresponding suspension storage area (B3719).

  Next, effect control device 300 sets a change timing determination table (see FIG. 104) corresponding to the final hold icon information (B3720), and determines a hold change timing (change pattern) based on the number of holds (the number of storages). (B3721).

  Next, effect control device 300 sets the determined hold change timing information and the initial icon display information in the corresponding hold storage area (B3722), and determines whether there is a change after the start winning (B3723). Here, a case where there is a change after the start winning is a case where the initial display mode of the hold icon 83 displayed at the time of winning is different from the final display mode displayed at the time of digestion.

  If there is a change after the start winning (the result of B3723 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the information indicating that there is a change suggestion notice in the corresponding hold storage area (B3718), and ends this processing.

  If there is no change after the start prize (the result of B3723 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines by lottery whether or not to add a change suggestion notice effect in order to add a gaseous effect (B3725). ). Here, since the effect is added as a gash, the probability of adding the change suggestion advance effect is set to a low probability.

  If the change suggestion notice effect is added by the lottery in step B3725 (result of B3726 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets change suggestion notice information in the corresponding hold storage area (B3718). Then, the present process ends.

  When the change suggestion notice effect is not added by the lottery in step B3725 (result of B3726 is "N"), effect control device 300 sets change suggestion no notice information in the corresponding reserved storage area (B3705). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the final hold icon is not in the advance notice mode, that is, if the final hold icon is white (result of B3710 is “N”), information of no change notice is set in the corresponding hold storage area (B3724). ), And execute the processing after B3725.

  The type of the effect may be changed in accordance with the degree of reliability of the change in the hold storage.

  Further, in the hold change timing determination tables 1 to 3, so-called rank-down changes that reduce reliability such as changing the hold display displayed in red to blue may be set.

[Special figure 1 hold display processing]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 hold display process according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process for displaying the hold icon 83 based on the set initial hold icon display information and final hold icon display information.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the fluctuation display game has been started (B3801). If the fluctuation has not been started (the result of B3801 is “N”), the processing from B3802 to B3812 is executed. Instead, the processing of B3813 is executed.

  If the change has been started (result of B3801 is “Y”), effect control device 300 checks by determining whether or not there is a hold storage in which display hold notice information is set (B3802, B3803). ).

  When there is no hold storage in which the display hold notice information is set (result of B3803 is “N”), effect control device 300 executes the process of B3813 without executing the processes of B3804 to B3812.

  When there is a hold storage in which the display hold notice information is set (result of B3803 is “Y”), effect control device 300 updates the corresponding hold icon display information based on the change notice timing information (B3804), It is determined whether there is any pending icon 83 that changes from the initial display mode of the pending icon 83 (B3805).

  If there is a changing hold icon 83 (result of B3805 is "Y"), effect control device 300 determines whether or not mechanical hold advance notice is being executed (B3806), and mechanical hold advance notice is being executed. If not (B3806 result is "N"), the output of the holding change sound is set (B3807). If there are a plurality of changing holding icons 83, the changing sound may be output by the number of changing holding icons 83 or a special changing sound may be output.

  If there is no change holding icon 83 (result of B3805 is "N"), effect control device 300 executes the processing after B3808 without setting a holding change sound because the holding change does not occur.

  Next, effect control device 300 checks and determines whether or not there is a pending storage that changes to the final pending icon information (B3808, B3809).

If there is no hold storage that changes to the last hold icon information (result of B3809 is "N"), effect control device 300 checks whether there is a hold memory that is executing the gasp change suggestion notice, and makes a determination. (B3810, B3811).

  If there is a pending storage that changes to the final pending icon information (result of B3809 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes the processing from B3812 onward without executing the processing from B3810 to B3811.

  If there is a pending memory that is executing the gasp change suggestion notice (the result of B3811 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 changes the change suggestion notice information of the relevant hold memory to the information without the change suggestion notice ( B3812).

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a hold display execution process of displaying each hold icon 83 and an effect based on the number of hold storage, the hold icon display information, and the change suggestion advance notice information (B3813), and executes this process. To end.

  On the other hand, when there is no hold memory during execution of the gasp change suggestion notice (result of B3811 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets B3813 without setting the change suggestion no notice notice information in the corresponding hold memory. Execute the processing of

[Mechanical suspension notice execution processing]
FIG. 107A is a flowchart illustrating the first half of the procedure of the mechanical suspension notice execution process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The first half of the mechanical suspension notice execution processing is processing for setting information on the change timing and the change mode of the mechanical suspension notice.

  FIG. 107B is a flowchart illustrating the latter half of the mechanical suspension notice execution process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The latter half of the mechanical suspension notice execution processing is processing for setting advance notice suggestion information for the mechanical suspension notice. The advance suggestion for the mechanical suspension announcement is, as described later, an advance announcement based on whether or not the register mark 73a (see FIG. 109) and the butterfly 73b (see FIG. 109) fly to the target suspension display unit (mechanical suspension storage) 511. Is a suggestion.

  FIG. 108 is a view for explaining the structure of the reserved storage area according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108A is a view for explaining the structure of the special figure 1 reserved storage area 360, and FIG. FIG. 2C is a diagram illustrating the structure of the special figure 2 hold storage area 370, and FIG. 2C is a view illustrating the structure of the digestion hold storage area 362 and the standby hold storage areas 1 to 4 (363 to 366) of FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a view for explaining the advance notice character 73 according to the first embodiment of this invention. When the register mark 73a or the butterfly 73b stays above the hold display unit (mechanical hold memory) 511, the mechanical hold memory 511 is opened.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the mechanical suspension notice information is set to a special figure 1 start winning (B3901).

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, the mechanical hold advance notice is executed only for the hold storage of the special figure 1. Therefore, when the mechanical hold advance notice information is not set in the special figure 1 (B3901). Is "N"), the effect control device 300 executes the processing after B3915 without executing the first half of the mechanical suspension notice execution processing (processing of setting the change timing and the change mode information of the mechanical suspension notice). Execute

  When the mechanical suspension notice information is set in the special figure 1 (result of B3901 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of storages in the special figure 1 is the specified number. Is determined (B3902). The determination value here is set to, for example, “4”.

  If the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is not four (the result of B3902 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the processing after B3915 without executing the processing of the first half of this processing.

  If the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is four (result of B3902 is “Y”), it is checked whether there is a reservation storage of Toku-zu 1 in which the mechanical reservation advance notice information is set and determined ( B3903, B3904).

  When there is no hold storage of the special figure 1 in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set (result of B3904 is “N”), it is not necessary to set information on the change timing and the change mode of the mechanical hold advance notice. The apparatus 300 executes the processing after B3915 without executing the first half of this processing.

  If there is a hold storage of the special figure 1 in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set (result of B3904 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the digest storage order in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set to 1 It is determined whether or not it is the second (B3905).

  If the digestion order is the first (the result of B3905 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 acquires the remaining fluctuation time of the running fluctuation display game (B3906), and the remaining fluctuation time exceeds the predetermined time. It is determined whether or not is also long (B3907).

  When the remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the predetermined time (result of B3907 is “N”), effect control device 300 has no change suggestion notice in the hold storage area (change suggestion notice information area 387) of the target hold storage. Information is set (B3908), and the effect is released. The structure of the reserved storage area will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, effect control device 300 sets the pending change notice information area 384 of the pending change notice information area 384 of the target pending storage, and the white lighting information in the pending display LED lighting information area 388 of the target pending storage. It is set (B3909).

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a mechanical hold advance notice gasse operation (elevation) for moving hold display unit 510 up and down (B3910).

  If the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time (result of B3907 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines a hold change timing based on the digestion order of the target hold memory (B3912).

  Next, effect control device 300 sets the determined hold change timing information in the hold change timing information area 385 of the target hold memory, and sets the white blinking information of hold display LED 513 in the hold display LED lighting information area 388 ( B3913). By setting the white lighting information of the hold display LED 513, an effect (blinking white) of the mechanical hold notice is set.

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a mechanical hold advance notice main operation (elevation) in order to cause hold display unit 510 to perform a main operation instead of a gutter (B3914).

  On the other hand, when the digestion order is not the first (result of B3905 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets white lighting information in the hold display LED lighting information area 388 of the hold memory with the first digestion order. (B3911), and executes the processing from B3912 to B3914.

In this way, when the specified number of hold storages are targeted for the hold storage of the special map 1, the effect of the mechanical hold advance notice and the lighting information of the hold display LED 513 are set, and the rising operation of the hold display unit 510 is also performed. The settings are made. In addition, when the notice effect by the hold icon 83 is being executed, control may be performed so that the mechanical hold notice is not executed so as not to hinder the notice effect.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the mechanical suspension notice is being executed, that is, whether or not suspension display unit 510 is rising (B3915).

  When the mechanical suspension notice is not being executed (the result of B3915 is “N”), the effect control device 300 operates the movable member (petal) 512 of each hold display unit 511 based on the effect operation information. A certain hold display section operation process is executed (B3932), and this process ends.

  When the mechanical suspension notice is being executed (result of B3915 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 turns on the suspension display LED 513 based on the suspension storage number and the suspension display LED lighting information. An LED lighting process is executed (B3916).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current time is the hold change timing (B3917).

  If the current time is the hold change timing (result of B3917 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines based on the last hold icon information set in the last hold icon information area 383 of the target hold memory. The notice suggestion character 73 (see FIG. 109) is determined (B3918).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes the lighting change main effect by the determined advance notice character 73 (B3919). The lighting change main effect includes a suggestion effect by the notice suggestion character 73, a change effect of the lighting mode of the mechanical hold memory 511, and a flowering effect of the movable member.

  Next, effect control device 300 changes the hold display LED lighting information set in hold hold LED lighting information area 388 of the target hold memory to lighting information of a color corresponding to the final hold icon information (B3920). .

  Next, the effect control device 300 changes the effect operation information set in the effect operation information area 389 of the target hold storage from the flower closing information to the flowering information (B3921).

  On the other hand, when the current time is not the hold change timing (the result of B3917 is “N”), the effect control device 300 randomly selects the execution of the lighting change gassing effect by the notice suggestion character 73 (B3922).

  Only when a lottery is won (the result of B3922 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes a lighting change gassed effect by the notice suggestion character 1 (see FIG. 109) (B3923). The lighting change gasket effect is a gasket effect by the notice suggestion character 73 (dragonfly 73a). is there.

  Next, effect control device 300 checks and determines whether or not the change of the hold storage in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set has been started (B3925, B3926).

If the fluctuation has started (the result of B3926 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the mechanical suspension notice is the end timing (B3927).

  If the change has not been started (the result of B3926 is “N”), or if the mechanical suspension notice is not the end timing (the result of B3927 is “N”), the effect control device 300 returns the processing from B3928 to B3931. Without executing the process, the hold display unit operation process is executed (B3932), and this process ends.

  If the mechanical suspension notice is the end timing (result of B3927 is “Y”), effect control device 300 changes suspension icon display information area 386 in digestion suspension storage area 362 to final suspension icon information (B3929). ).

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a mechanical suspension notice end operation (downward) for lowering suspension display unit 510 (B3930), and turns off suspension display LED 513 of mechanical suspension memory 511 (B3931).

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a pending display unit operation process (B3932), and ends this process.

  As described above, in the latter half of the processing, when the hold display unit 510 is raised to the effect position, whether or not the advance suggestion character 73 is selected, the advance suggestion effect is performed, the lighting information of the mechanical hold display LED 513, etc. Is set. In addition, when it is the end timing of the mechanical suspension notice, the display mode of the suspension icon 83, the lowering of the suspension display unit 510, the turning off of the suspension display LED 513, and the like are set.

  Note that, here, control is performed such that when the number of storages to be held in the special figure 1 reaches four, a mechanical hold advance notice is executed. Alternatively, any one of the mechanical suspension notices may be executed with priority.

  As for the structure of the reserved storage, as shown in FIG. 108A, a special figure 1 reserved storage area 360 and a special figure 2 reserved storage area 370 are provided. The special figure 1 hold storage area 360 includes a hold number storage area 361 in which the number of holds is set, a digestion hold storage area 362 in which information on the hold being executed is set, and standby hold storage areas 363 to 366 from 1 to 4. Defined by

  Of these, the digestion pending storage area 362 and each of the standby pending storage areas 363 to 366 are composed of nine information areas shown in FIG. More specifically, the variation pattern information area 381, the stop symbol information area 382, the final pending icon information area 383, the pending change notice information area 384, the pending change timing information area 385, the pending icon display information area 386, and the change suggestion notice information area 387, a hold display LED lighting information area 388, and a performance operation information area 389.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, the information relating to the mechanical hold storage 511 is not set in the special figure 2, but the structure of the special figure 2 hold storage area 370 shown in FIG. The structure is the same as that of 360, and the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109, for example, the notice suggestion character 73 (a dragonfly) 73a with a low degree of expectation that the mechanical hold memory 511 changes (flowers) and the mechanical hold memory 511 changes (flowering) as shown in FIG. 109. (S)) There is a notice suggestion character 2 (butterfly) 73b with high expectation. Each character 73 is displayed on the display device 41. For example, while appearing from the side of the screen and jumping left and right, the character 73 stays at the upper part of one or a plurality of mechanical hold memories 511 for a short time or jumps off without stopping at all. I do.

[Operation and screen transition of the hold display unit when this effect is executed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110A to FIG. 110D, an operation of the hold display unit 510 and a screen display when the main effect (that is, the non-gase effect) by the mechanical hold storage 511 is executed will be described.

  FIGS. 110A to 110D are views for explaining the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the display at the bottom of the screen when the main effect of the first embodiment of the present invention is executed. Here, a description will be given from the start to the end of the mechanical suspension notice.

  Prior to the start of the mechanical suspension notice, a fourth prize is generated in the special figure 1, and the remaining time of the running variable display game is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, so that the execution condition of the mechanical suspension notice is satisfied. Also, before the start of the mechanical suspension notice, the effect of the third suspension icon 83c with the effect is notified that the degree of reliability is high. High performance is performed.

  (A) of FIG. 110A shows a state in which three special figure 1 hold memories are displayed. The first hold icon 83a is displayed in blue, the second hold icon 83b is displayed in white, the third hold icon 83c is displayed in a white mode with an effect, and the effect of the third hold icon 83c is an effect indicating a mechanical hold notice. It is. Further, the mode display section 87 informs (preliminary notice) to the player that something will happen when the number of reservations becomes four, such as "when four reservations are stored now ...". In the digestion hold display area 88, the reliability of the hold memory of the currently displayed variable display game is displayed in white, and all the special symbols on the left, middle, and right are changing. Hold display unit 510 is housed in hold display unit case 500.

  (B) shows the state where the fourth hold storage is displayed in Toku-zu. Since the fourth prize has occurred during the transition from (A) to (B), the mode display section 87 displays "Yes, fourth!" And informs that the number of holds has reached four. At the same time, the holding of the winning is displayed in the fourth holding icon 83d. In addition, the mechanical notice suspension has been started, and the suspension display unit 510 has started to rise from the standby position.

  (C) shows a state where the hold display unit 510 has risen to the effect position. When the ascending of the hold display unit 510 is completed, the mode is set to the announcement effect mode by the mechanical hold memory 511, so that the mode display section 87 displays "mechanical notice mode". In addition, since the hold display unit 510 is raised, the visibility of the hold icon 83 at the rear is blocked, so that the player cannot see the hold icon 83 while the hold display unit 510 is in the production position, or It is difficult to see. The hold icon 83 displayed at the rear is displayed small in the lower right part of (C) for convenience, but such a display is not displayed on the shielding wall 502 in the actual gaming machine 10.

  In (C), the suspension display LED 513 of the third suspension display unit 511c corresponding to the third suspension icon 83c displayed in the white mode with the effect is blinking white. Although the first hold icon 83a is displayed in blue, the first hold display section 511a is displayed as white lighting.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, the synchronization control between the hold icon 83 and the hold display unit 511 is not performed. For example, both the hold icon 83 and the hold display unit 511 are not reliable based on the change pattern random number and the change pattern table. The control may be performed so that the degrees are synchronized.

  (D) shows a state in which the result of the currently displayed variable display game is determined.

  (E) shows a state in which the display of the hold storage (the hold icon 83) moves one by one to the left, and a new variable display game is started. On the screen, a hold memory that is currently executing the variable display game is displayed in a digestion hold display area 88 in a blue manner, and a butterfly 73 b appears as a notice suggestion character 73 from the right side. In the hold display unit 510 as well, the display of each hold display unit 511 moves one by one to the left, and the second hold display unit 511b flashes. The suspension display LED 513 of the fourth suspension display section 511d and the fourth suspension icon 83d as a rear display are off.

  (F), the butterfly 73b stays above the blinking second hold display section 511b, and the hold display LED 513 changes from white to yellow (preliminary lighting mode), and at the same time, the petals 512 of the second hold display section 511b turn on. It shows a state in which it is expanded. The fact that the mechanical hold memory 511 has bloomed indicates that the second hold memory has high reliability. Although the expanding operation of the petal 512 is performed only once, the expanding operation may be executed a number of times corresponding to the promotion stage (for example, two times if the promotion is performed in two stages).

  Even if the effect mode of the second hold display unit 511b changes from the closed state to the open state, the display mode of the second hold icon 83b at the rear does not change. The display of the hold icon 83 at the rear has the same display transition as that when the hold display unit 510 does not operate, so that the display control of the hold display icon needs to be changed between when the hold display unit 510 operates and when it does not operate. And the control load of the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

  (G) shows a state where the butterfly 73b staying at the upper part of the second hold display part 511b has jumped up. The second hold display section 511b continuously emits light in a yellow mode and is in a flowering state.

  (H) shows a state in which the result of the running variable display game is determined.

  (I) shows a state in which a new variable display game has been started and the display of the hold icon 83 at the rear and the hold display section 511 on the front face have moved to the left one by one. The second hold display portion 511b, which was in the flowering state in (G), is closed, and the first hold display portion 511a is in the flowering state.

  (J) shows a state in which a new prize is generated, a new display is displayed on the third hold display section 511c and the third hold icon 83c at the rear, and the result of the running variable display game being executed is determined. I have. The new winning is displayed as a blue mode in the rear hold icon 83, but is displayed in a white mode in the mechanical hold memory 511.

  (K) shows a state in which a new variable display game has been started, and the display of the hold icon 83 at the rear and the display of the hold display section 511 on the front have been moved one by one to the left. The hold memory whose execution has been started was displayed in the effect hold white mode in the hold icon 83 at the rear, but was displayed in the yellow mode in the mechanical hold memory 511, and thus displayed in the digestion hold display area 88 in the yellow mode. Have been. Also, the first hold display portion 511a that has been in the flowering state in (J) is in the flowering state.

  (L) shows a state where the hold display unit 510 has been lowered from the production position to the standby position. When the fluctuation display game of the flowering hold memory is started, the hold display unit 510 returns to the standby position. When there are a plurality of the hold display units 511 in the flowering state, the hold display unit 510 moves down to the standby position at the timing when all the hold memories in the flowering state have been consumed.

  (M) shows a state in which the running variable display game is in the reach state, and each of the suspension display LEDs 513 of the suspension display unit 510 at the standby position emits light. All of the first to fourth hold display units 511 are in a closed state, and when in the closed state, the light of the hold display LED 513 is applied to the light transmitting lens unit 503 as convergent light.

  (N) shows a state in which the effect of the first half of the SP2 reach is being executed. The second hold display portion 511b and the fourth hold display portion 511d at the standby position are in a flowering state, and the second hold display portion 511b and the light-transmitting lens portion 503 on the front surface of the fourth hold display emit large light. When the petal 512 is in a flowering state, the light of the hold display LED 513 is emitted to the light transmitting lens unit 503 as diffused light.

  (O) represents a state in which the effect of the latter half of the SP2 reach is being executed. All the first to fourth hold display units 511 at the standby position are in a flowering state, and the light transmitting lens units 503 on the front surfaces of all the hold display units 511 emit large light. The reach effect enters the latter half, and the higher the reliability, the more the flowering state, and the light emitting effect by the diffused light is executed.

  In this way, in the lighting change main effect, the suggestion effect by the advance notice character 73, the effect of changing the lighting mode of the hold display LED 513, and the flowering effect by the movable member 512 are executed. Even when the hold display unit 510 returns to the standby position, the light emission effect of the hold display LED 513 and the operation effect of the movable member are executed, and the light emission effect of the light transmitting lens unit 503 is executed by the irradiation light of the hold display LED 513.

[Operation of display unit on hold and screen transition 1 when gassing effect is executed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the screen display when the draw effect is executed by the mechanical hold storage 511 will be described. Here, a gaseous effect in which the hold display unit 510 rises to the effect position and immediately descends to the standby position will be described.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the display at the bottom of the screen when the draw effect is performed by the raising / lowering operation of the hold display unit 510 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 111A shows a state in which three hold memories are displayed. The first hold icon 83a is displayed in blue, the second hold icon 83b is displayed in white, and the third hold icon 83c is displayed in a white mode with an effect. Further, the mode display section 87 informs the player that something will happen when the number of reservations becomes four, such as "when four reservations are accumulated now ...". In the digestion hold display area 88, the reliability of the hold memory of the currently displayed variable display game is displayed in white, and all the special symbols on the left, middle, and right are changing. Hold display unit 510 is in a standby state at the standby position.

  (B) shows the state where the fourth hold storage is displayed in Toku-zu. On the mode display section 87, "Yes, the fourth has arrived!" Is displayed to notify that the number of holds has reached four, and the fourth hold icon 83d displays the hold storage of the winning. Further, the hold display unit 510 has started to rise from the standby position.

  (C) shows a state where the hold display unit 510 has risen to the effect position. Although the hold display unit 510 has moved up to the effect position, the mode display section 87 displays "normal mode" to notify that the mode is not the mechanical notice mode. That is, depending on the player, the mode display unit 87 can recognize that it is a fuzzy effect.

  (D) shows a state where the hold display unit 510 is lowered to the standby position. The register mark 73a jumps up from the upper part of the third hold display unit 511c to the right side of the screen so as to impress that the rise of the hold display unit 510 this time is a gassing effect. Note that the display of the rear holding icon 83 is the same as before the rising of the holding unit and after the lowering of the holding unit. Effects may disappear.

  In this manner, as one pattern of the draw effect using the suspension display unit 510, the suspension display unit 510 temporarily rises and immediately descends to the standby position.

  The gasket effect described here is an example, and is not shown. For example, the gasket effect in which the hold display unit 510 descends to the standby position in synchronization with the timing at which the notice suggestion character 73 comes to the blinking hold display unit 511. May be executed.

[Operation of display unit on hold and screen transition 2 when gassing effect is executed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the screen display when the gasket effect by the mechanical hold storage 511 is executed will be described. Here, a gaseous effect in which the effect is ended in a closed state without the flowering of the hold display portion 511 in which the hold display LED 513 is blinking will be described.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the display at the bottom of the screen when the draw effect is executed by the notice suggestion character 73 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 112 (A) shows a state where the hold display unit 510 has been raised to the effect position and three hold memories are displayed. The second hold display section 511b is blinking, indicating that the reliability is high. Also, a butterfly 73b appears from the right side of the screen and is directed to the left. In addition, since the hold display unit 510 is in the effect state, the mode display section 87 displays “mechanical notice mode”. Since the second hold display section 511b has an effect (blinking), it makes the player expect that the second hold display section 511b will shift from the closed state to the open state.

  (B) shows a state in which the butterfly 73b has jumped above the second hold display unit 511b.

  (C) shows a state in which the butterfly 73b flies to the left side of the screen without staying at the second hold display unit 511b. If the butterfly 73b stays in the blinking second hold display part 511b, the second hold display part 511b will be in a flowering state and a higher reliability will be notified. In this case, the butterfly 73b appears to stay and stops after all. Disappears without notice. The blinking second hold display portion 511b continues to blink, and the butterfly 73b may re-bounce.

  The notice suggestion character 73 returns to the direction in which it appeared and goes out of the frame, but may move in the opposite direction to the direction in which it appeared and go out of the frame, or determine which side to go out of the frame by lottery. You may.

  As described above, as another pattern of the draw effect using the hold display unit 510, even if the hold display unit 510 is raised and the “mechanical notice mode” is displayed on the mode display unit 87, the flying announcement suggestion character 73 is displayed. An effect of flying away from the hold display unit 511 is executed. Therefore, the mechanical notice mode ends without the blinking hold display section 511 blooming.

(Effects of the First Embodiment)
As described above, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the hold display unit (second display unit) 510 is arranged so as to face the standby hold display area 80 (first display unit), and the game progresses. The second display unit 510 moves to the standby position (first position) or the production position (second position) in accordance with. Therefore, the movement of the second display unit 510 causes the hold display on the first display unit 80 to be seen and hidden, and the appearance of the hold display changes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, second display unit 510 is moved from the first position to the second position based on the result of the preliminary determination (pre-reading). Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the movement of the second display unit 510 may produce a special result.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when the number of storages in the hold storage reaches a predetermined number, second display unit 510 moves from the first position to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a desire to increase the number of memories in order to move the second display unit 510, and to promote active participation in the game.

  Also, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the second display unit 510 covers the first display unit 80 from the player and holds the first display unit 80 separately from the hold icon 83 displayed on the first display unit 80. The display unit 511 executes a notification effect (mechanical suspension notice) on the reliability of the suspension storage. The hold display unit 511 includes a movable member (petal) 512 and a hold display LED (hold light) 513, and emits the hold light 513 as a notice lighting mode based on the result of the preliminary determination. Further, based on the result of the pre-determination, the movable member 512 executes a notification effect of reliability accompanied by a mechanical operation. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce the notice lighting mode, and it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the special result will be obtained. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with a new and comical notification effect that has never been seen before.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when the second display portion is at the first position, the holding effect is not executed, while when the second display portion is at the second position, the holding effect is executed. For this reason, it is possible to impress the player with the hold effect by the second display unit, and the interest of the game is effectively improved.

  According to the first embodiment of the present invention, a shielding wall (shielding part) 502 is provided in front of the second display unit 510 at the first position. Therefore, when the second display unit 510 is at the first position, the visibility of the second display unit 510 is restricted, and the effect when the second display unit 510 moves to the second position is significantly improved. I do.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the shielding unit 502 includes the light transmitting lens unit 503 that can transmit the light emitted from the holding lamp 513. Then, even if the second display unit 510 is lowered to the first position, if the SP reach is being performed, the second display unit 510 emits the holding lamp 513 at the first position and opens and closes the movable member 512. Therefore, the player can be given a sense of expectation by the convergent light or the diffused light applied to the light transmitting lens unit 503.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when the announcement suggestion character 73 indicating the execution of the mechanical suspension announcement (holding display by the second display unit) flies above the suspension display unit 511 and stays, it is movable. The member 512 expands from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced in executing the mechanical suspension notice.

Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the second display unit 510 temporarily rises and then immediately descends, and the suspension display unit 511 in the blinking state is displayed by the notice suggestion character 73. Gase production that jumps over the top and eventually disappears without staying anywhere is executed. Therefore, the interest in the game can be further enhanced in executing the mechanical suspension notice.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the display mode of the hold display unit 511 is a separate display control independent of the hold icon 83, so that the control load of the effect control device 300 can be reduced. it can.

[Modification 3 of First Embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), only a small gap is provided between the hold display unit 510 and the display device 41. , The player cannot visually recognize the hold icon 83 at the rear. On the other hand, in the present modification, by providing a larger gap between the hold display unit 510 and the display device 41 than in the first embodiment, the rear hold icon 83 can be visually recognized depending on the viewpoint of the player. It becomes possible.

  FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the hold display unit case 500 in which the hold display unit 510 according to the third modification of the first embodiment of the present invention is at the initial position (standby position, first position).

  FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view of the hold display unit case 500 and the display device 41 according to the third modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present modification, for example, a width of about one finger is provided between the hold display unit 510 indicated by “W” in FIG. 113 and the display device 41. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 114, even if the hold display unit 510 moves up to the production position (the operation position, the second position), the player moves his / her line of sight upward to move the lower part of the screen from above the hold display unit 510. By looking into it, a part or all of the hold icon 83 can be visually recognized.

  Since the display mode of the hold icon 83 is maintained irrespective of the elevation of the hold display unit 510, the player checks the display mode and the change mode of both the hold display unit 511 and the hold icon 83 and enjoys the notice effect. be able to.

(Effect of Modification 3 of First Embodiment)
As described above, according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention, even if the hold display unit (second display unit) 510 is raised, the player can display the hold displayed on first display unit 80. A preview effect can be enjoyed while watching the hold storage of both the icon 83 and the hold display unit 511 provided in the second display unit 510. Thus, the player can see the advance notice effect on the first display unit 80 and the advance notice effect on the second display unit 510 by shifting the viewpoint, thereby providing the player with a novel notice effect that has not been available. Can be.

  Furthermore, even if the display mode of the hold icon 83 does not change, the movable member 512 can bloom, thereby increasing the player's expectation, and by actually connecting to the big hit, the player can be given the reliability of the mechanical hold notice. You can have.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, a mechanical suspension notice for notifying the reliability is executed by the suspension display unit 510 that moves up and down, the suspension display LED 513 whose display mode changes, and the petals 512 that open and close. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, four independent box-shaped box portions 514 corresponding to the hold storage display are provided, and the door (movable member) 515 provided in each box portion 514 is opened / closed or opened. A preliminary announcement effect for notifying the degree of reliability is performed by the illumination from.

[Hold display unit]
FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the display device 41 and the hold display unit 510 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the hold display unit 510 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  As shown in FIG. 115, in the present embodiment, the box section 514 provided in the hold display unit 510 reports the reliability. The hold display unit 510 is installed in front of the lower part of the display device 41, and the lower part of the display device 41 is blocked by the box 514.

  The hold display unit 510 includes four box units 514 from a first box unit 514a to a fourth box unit 514d. The box portion 514 is a box-shaped effect device, and includes a pair of doors 515 formed of a translucent member on the front surface. In addition, below the pair of doors 515, an operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 displayed as “PUSH” is provided. When the effect button 25 is operated at the timing when the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 emits light, the door 515 is opened. You.

  A notice character 74 (see FIG. 119) is displayed below the display device 41 overlapping the box portion 514, and when the door 515 is opened, the notice character 74 can be visually recognized in detail. Since the door 515 is formed of a translucent member, the player can visually recognize the notice suggestion character 73 as a hazy notice suggestion silhouette 74f (see FIG. 121) even through the door 515.

  Note that the digestion suspension display area 88 may be set on the display screen of the display device 41 to display the suspension icon 83 during execution of the variable display game.

  Further, the hold display unit 510 may be fixedly disposed below the display device 41, or may be provided so as to be able to move up and down from inside the stage 43.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the hold display unit 510 of this embodiment includes a box unit 514, an LED board 518, and a unit base 520 in order from the top. The box portion 514 includes a pair of doors 515 on the front surface and a bottom lens portion 517 for scattering light emitted from below on the bottom surface. In addition, the back surface of the box portion 514 is in a state where it is pulled out so as not to hinder the visibility of the display device 41 or is made of a transparent member. In addition, since the entire surface of the box unit 514 is formed of a translucent member, the box unit 514 itself emits light by irradiation light from below, and each box unit 514 replaces the holding storage (holding display). .

  The LED board 518 includes a hold-on LED (hold lamp) 518a that irradiates the upper box unit 514 from below, and an operation suggestion LED 518b that causes the operation suggestion light-emitting unit 516 displayed as "PUSH" to emit light. The reserved lighting LED 518a can emit a plurality of colors.

The unit base 520 includes a lens 519 that scatters light emitted from behind toward the front, and includes an operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 displayed as “PUSH”. Although the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 is not directly operated by the player's hand, for example, the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 can be directly operated by the player's hand by using the cover glass 14 as a touch panel type member. Is also good.

[Special figure 1 reservation notice setting processing]
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 hold notice setting process according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the special figure 1 hold notice setting process of the first embodiment, initial display information and final display information of the hold icon 83, mechanical hold notice information, change suggestion notice effect, and the like are set. In the holding notice setting process shown in FIG. 1, whether or not the holding notice effect is executed, selection of the notice character 74, and the like are set.

  FIG. 118 is a view for explaining a preview character determination table according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 119 is a view for explaining a preview character 74 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

  The effect control device 300 first refers to the special figure 1 hold storage area 360 (B4001), and determines whether or not the number of holds is one or more (B4002).

  When the number of holdings is not 1 or more, that is, when the number of holdings is 0 (result of B4002 is “N”), there is no need to set a holding announcement effect, and the effect control device 300 executes this processing. finish.

  When the number of suspensions is 1 or more (result of B4002 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not continuous notice information is set (B4003).

  When the continuous announcement information is set (result of B4003 is “Y”), there is no need to set the suspension announcement effect, and the effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  When the continuous notice information is not set (result of B4003 is "N"), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pending notice information is set (B4004).

  If the suspension notice information has not been set (result of B4004 is “N”), effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  When the suspension notice information is set (result of B4004 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of suspensions in Toku-zu 1 is 1 (B4005), and Only when it is 1 (the result of B4005 is “Y”), the remaining fluctuation time is acquired (B4006), and it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is longer than a predetermined time (B3702).

  If the remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the predetermined time (the result of B3702 is “N”), it is not possible to secure a sufficient time for executing the hold notice effect, and the effect control device 300 requires the hold notice effect. This processing ends without setting the information.

  When the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time (result of B3702 is “Y”), effect control device 300 acquires stop symbol information (B4007) and determines whether or not the stop symbol is a big hit symbol. (B3706).

If the stop symbol is a big hit symbol (result of B3706 is “Y”), effect control device 3
00 determines that the hold announcement effect is to be executed at a high rate (B4011). Even if it is a big hit, the reserved announcement effect is not necessarily executed, so that the reserved announcement effect brings uncertainty, that is, unexpectedness is provided to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol is not the big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “N”), the effect control device 300 acquires the variation pattern information (B4008), and determines whether or not the variation pattern causes the reach. A determination is made (B4009).

  If the fluctuation pattern does not cause the reach (result of B4009 is “N”), it is not possible to secure a sufficient time for executing the hold notice effect, and the effect control device 300 sets the information necessary for the hold notice effect. This processing ends without setting.

  If the variation pattern is such that a reach occurs (result of B4009 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a hold announcement effect at a probability according to the type of reach (B4010). In other words, the higher the reach is, the higher the hold announcement effect is executed.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute the reservation notice effect (B4012). If the reservation notice effect is not to be executed (result of B4012 is “N”), effect control device 300 This processing ends without setting the information necessary for the hold announcement effect.

  When the hold announcement effect is to be executed (result of B4012 is “Y”), effect control device 300 acquires the fluctuation pattern information again (B4013), and based on the announcement character determination table shown in FIG. Is determined (B4014). That is, the higher the reach is, the higher the reliability of the notice character 74 (see FIG. 119) is determined.

  Next, effect control device 300 sets the determined suspension notice information in the suspension storage area corresponding to the number of suspensions (B4015), and ends this processing.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the notice character 74 is prepared from a character A 74a having low reliability to a character D 74d having high reliability, and the emission color of the reserved lighting LED 518a is set for each character. Since all of the characters A74a to D74d have similar contours, it is difficult for the player to recognize them even when displayed as the notice suggestion silhouette 74f (see FIG. 121).

  When the variable display game is started when the lighting information is set, the hold lighting LED 518a lights in a white mode, and lights in a color corresponding to the notice character 74 set when the door 515 opens. When the notice character 74 is not set, the lighting in the white mode continues until the variable display game ends. Note that the hold lighting LED 518a may be turned on and off at the timing of reaching, for example.

[Special figure 1 hold display processing]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 hold display process according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the special figure 1 hold display process in this embodiment, lighting information of the LED board 518 is set.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 change display game has started (B3801), and only when the change has started (the result of B3801 is "Y"), based on the lighting information. The hold display unit 511 is turned on (B4101).

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the suspension notice information is set (B4).
102). If the suspension notice information has not been set (result of B4102 is “N”), effect control device 300 executes the processing after B4111 without executing the processing from B4103 to B4110.

  When the reservation notice information is set (result of B4102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 displays notice suggestion silhouette 74f in a display area (that is, display screen) behind target reservation display section 511. It is displayed (B4103). The notice suggestion silhouette 74f is one in which the characters A74a to D74d are displayed as silhouettes. Since both characters have similar contours, and the door 515 has a scattering part due to minute unevenness, when the notice suggestion silhouette 74f is seen through the door 515, the silhouette is visually recognized as a hazy silhouette as a whole. Therefore, it is not easy to distinguish the character A 74a to the character D 74d from the notice suggestion silhouette 74f through the door 515. Alternatively, the notice suggestion silhouettes 74f may all be the same silhouette.

  Next, the effect control device 300 turns on the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 of the target hold display unit 511 (B4104), and determines whether or not the effect button 25 is operated (B4105). As described above, when the effect button 25 is operated at the timing when the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 emits light, the door 515 is opened. In addition to the effect button 25, a dedicated operation unit for the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 may be provided.

  When the effect button 25 is operated (the result of B4105 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 displays the notice character 74 in a display area (that is, a display screen) behind the target hold display unit 511. (B4106).

  Next, effect control device 300 sets opening information of door 515 for a predetermined period of time in target hold display unit 511, and causes door 515 to open (B4107).

  Next, effect control device 300 sets notice lighting information which is information for lighting the emission color corresponding to notice character 74 at the timing when door 515 is opened in the target hold storage unit (B4108).

  Next, effect control device 300 clears the setting of the suspension notice information (B4109), and turns off operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 (B4110).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not door 515 is being opened (B4111). If it is not opening (result of B4111 is "N"), this processing ends.

  If it is open (result of B4111 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the fluctuation has been started (B4112), and if the fluctuation has been started (the result of B4112 is Only in "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (B4113).

  When the opening time has elapsed (result of B4113 is “Y”) or when the fluctuation has not started (result of B4112 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets closing information of door 515. (B4114), the door 515 is closed. After that, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the opening time has not elapsed (the result of B4113 is “N”), it is not necessary to close the door 515, so the effect control device 300 ends this processing without setting the closing information. .

[Description of operation of hold display unit]
FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the hold display unit 510 according to the second embodiment of this invention. The hatched portion in the drawing indicates that the light is not emitted and the state is dark.

  FIG. 121A shows a state in which there are two pending storages. Both the first box portion 514a and the second box portion 514b emit light in a white mode. Light emission of each box unit 514 is caused by the reserved lighting LED 518a. All the operation suggestion light emitting units 516 are turned off.

  (B) shows a state in which the third box unit 514c emits light in a white mode and the third operation suggestion light emitting unit 516c emits light because a new winning has occurred. (BA) is a front view of the third box portion 514c at the same timing as (B). A notice suggestion silhouette 74f is displayed on the screen, and the notice suggestion silhouette 74f can be visually recognized through the door 515. (BA) indicates that the player is operating the effect button 25 at the timing when the third operation suggestion light emitting unit 516c emits light.

  (C) shows a state in which the door 515 of the third box portion 514c is opened, and the light emission mode of the third box portion 514c has changed from white to green. (CA) indicates a state where the door 515 is opened and the character C74c displayed on the screen can be confirmed. The green mode that is the emission color of the box portion 514 is a color corresponding to the character C74c. At the timing of (B), if the third operation suggestion light emitting unit 516c is turned off without operating the effect button 25, the third box unit 514c does not change to the green mode.

  (D) shows a state in which a new variable display game is started, the third box portion 514c is turned off, and the second box portion 514b is emitting light in a green mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the box unit 514 emits light as the hold memory, and the hold suggestion silhouette 74f is displayed for the hold memory with high expectation, and the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 emits light. Then, when the player operates the effect button 25 at the timing when the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 emits light, the door 515 is opened and the notice character 74 can be confirmed, and at the same time, the box unit 514 changes to the emission color corresponding to the notice character 74. I do.

  Note that the first to fourth operation suggestion light emitting units 516 are sequentially turned on, and the effect button 25 is operated at the timing when the operation suggestion light emission unit 516 of the box unit 514 displaying the notice suggestion silhouette 74f emits light. Only when this is done, the door 515 may be opened. In this case, a pressing operation by the player is required, and the game property is improved.

(Effect of Second Embodiment)
As described above, according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the box unit 514 provided in the second display unit 510 emits light as the hold memory, and the notice suggestion silhouette 74f is displayed for the hold memory with high expectation. While being displayed, the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 emits light. Then, when the player operates the effect button 25 at a timing at which the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 emits light, the door 515 is opened and the box unit 514 changes to a light emission color corresponding to the notice character 74 at the same time. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by an unprecedented novel effect.

  In addition, all the operation suggestion light emitting units 516 can be sequentially turned on, and when the player operates the effect button 25 at the timing when the target operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 is turned on, the door 515 is opened. Therefore, when the timing is excellently matched by the eye-pressing operation, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player, and the game characteristics are improved.

(Third embodiment)
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when a high-reliability hold storage occurs, there is a case in which a notification effect of the reliability accompanied by a mechanical elevating operation and an opening / closing operation is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the holding display unit 510 located at the lower part of the center case 40 during non-electric support is connected to the movable effect member (movable member) 44 when the state shifts to the electric support state. It moves (see FIG. 126), and finally the reliability is notified based on the presence or absence of the drop effect of the movable effect member 44. It is assumed that the start display memory of the special figure 2 is given priority over the start memory of the special figure 1 to execute the variable display game.

(Game board)
FIG. 122 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  In the gaming board 30 of the third embodiment, the warp device 42 is provided only on the left side of the center case 40, and four general winning openings 35 are provided in the gaming area 32 on the left side. The general winning opening 35 located at the bottom of the general winning opening 35 is a connected general winning opening in which two general winning openings 35 are horizontally connected.

  The game area 32 on the right side includes, in order from the top, a general figure starting gate 34, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 for opening the movable piece 37b for a predetermined period when the general figure fluctuation display game is hit, and a big hit of the special figure fluctuation display game. A rightward fluctuation winning device (right attacker) 39 is provided, which sometimes operates the opening / closing member to open the attacker (upper winning opening) for a predetermined period.

  In a lower game area 32, a special figure 1 starting winning opening 36 and a lower variable winning device (lower attacker) for opening an attacker (lower big winning opening) for a predetermined period by operating an opening / closing member at the time of a big hit of the special figure changing display game. 39 are provided. In the gaming board 30 of the present embodiment, a right-handed hit during a normal operation, a right-handed hit during a big hit and during a power support (during a probable change, during a shortened working hour) is an advantageous hitting method for a player.

  In addition, on the right edge of the center case 40 between the ordinary figure starting gate 34 and the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37, a special figure 1 fluctuation display LED 66 and a special figure 2 fluctuation display LED 67 are arranged in order from the top.

  Inside the center case 40, a movable effecting member 44 imitating an insect face, a display device 41, a warping device 42, and a stage 43 are arranged in order from the top. A decoration member 46 imitating a face of a caterpillar is provided inside the warp device 42 so as to be hidden about half of the rear of the warp device 42. A hold display unit 510 is provided in the horizontal direction.

  The hold display unit 510 includes four hold display units 511 for displaying the number of stored memories, and is attached to the back surface structure (not shown). The hold display section 511 includes a hold display LED 513 therein and can emit light. The hold display sections 511 can be connected and movable. Then, the hold display unit 510 can be moved to a position (production position, operation position, second position) corresponding to the special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d at the time of power support (during probable change, during working hours) (FIG. 126).

  As shown in FIG. 122, when the hold display unit 510 is at the initial position (standby position, first position), about 4/5 is hidden by the stage 43 and only the upper 1/5 is hidden. It is visible from the front. Behind the hold display section 511, the hold icon 83 of the special figure 1 is displayed so as to overlap. In other words, the stage 43, the hold display unit 510, and the display device 41 are arranged in this order from the front, and the hold icon 83 displayed on the display device 41 is superimposed and displayed on the back of the hold display unit 510 (hold display unit 511). You.

[Configuration in the center case]
FIG. 123 is a front view of the inside of the center case 40 excluding the stage 43 and the warping device 42 according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  The movable effect member 44 is movable from the initial position shown in FIG. 123 to the front of the display device 41, that is, downward. An LED (not shown) is provided inside, and a light emitting effect is possible, and the antenna (movable part) 44a can move up and down. The antenna 44a also changes state depending on the gaming state, and changes from a first state (low mode) in which the antenna 44a is lowered during non-electric support to a second state (high mode) in which the antenna 44a is raised during electric support. And migrate.

  The decoration device (decoration member) 46 has a built-in LED (not shown), is configured to execute a light emission effect at a predetermined timing, and to be able to vibrate and move.

  The hold display unit 511 includes a first hold display unit 511a, a second hold display unit 511b, a third hold display unit 511c, and a fourth hold display unit 511d in order from the left. Display), and emits light as a hold storage (hold display) of FIG. In FIG. 123, all the hold display units 511 are shaded, but also in the present embodiment, the state represented by the shaded line indicates a non-light emitting state.

  The normal fluctuation winning device 37 has a general figure display LED 37e in which a circle is lit when a general figure fluctuation display game is hit, and a cross is illuminated when the game is lost, and the movable piece 37b is opened. Then, the special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d is opened. For example, the ordinary figure display LED 37e may be illuminated by a circle when the special figure 2 starting winning port 37d is open, and may be illuminated by an x mark when the special figure 2 starting winning port 37d is closed.

  On the upper left of the screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reserved number display section 89a for displaying the reserved number of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 reserved number display section 89b for displaying the reserved number of the special figure 2 are provided. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 89a and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 89b are displayed with the same color numbers, but are displayed with different background colors, and are designed to be easily distinguished at a glance. Also, the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 89a and the special figure 2 reserved number display portion 89b are located at the upper left position where the movable effect member 44 is not shielded so that the number of reservations can be confirmed even when the movable effect member 44 moves downward. Will be displayed.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating the emission colors of the hold display section 511 and the hold icon 83 according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  In the present embodiment, for one hold storage, both the hold display unit 511 and the hold icon 83 emit light with the same emission color. The emission colors are classified into "white", "blue", "red", and "rainbow" according to the reliability at which the variable display game has a special result (big hit). Emits light.

[Description of operation of hold display section]
FIG. 125 is a front view of the inside of the center case 40 for explaining the state of the hold display unit 511 in the non-electric support state according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 126 is a front view of the inside of the center case 40 for explaining the state of the hold display unit 511 at the time of shifting to the power support according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  The non-power support state is a normal game state (normal game state) or a big hit (special game state), and the power support state is a specific game state during a probable change or during a reduction in working hours.

  In the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 125, the hold display unit 511 is located at an initial position in front of the hold icon 83 so as to overlap the hold icon 83 of Toku-zu. That is, since the reserved display portion 511 is located at a position connected to the decorative member 46 imitating the face of the caterpillar, the decorative member 46 and the four reserved display portions 511 appear as if the caterpillar are lying. . When the hold display unit 510 is at the initial position, each of the hold display units 511 emits light as the hold storage (hold display) of Toku-zu.

  When shifting to the power support mode, as shown in FIG. 126, the four hold display units 511 move in a vertical direction to a position (effect position) on the right side of the display device 41. That is, the first holding display portion 511a is provided at a position where the first holding display portion 511a is connected to the movable effect member 44, and the normal variable winning device 37 having a movable piece 37b imitating an insect needle is connected to the right of the fourth holding display portion 511d. The movable effect member 44, the hold display section 511, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are integrally seen as a large (powered-up) caterpillar. When the hold display unit 510 is at the effect position, the hold display unit 511 emits light as the hold storage (hold display) of FIG.

  The base member to which the hold display unit 511 is attached is configured by the flexible connection member 520a so that the first hold display unit 511a to the fourth hold display unit 511d operate in a connected manner.

  Since the special figure 1 hold icon 83 is continuously displayed on the hold display section 511 after the hold display section 511 has moved, the player can use the special figure 1 hold icon 83 to store the hold of the special figure 1 (hold display). You can check.

  A hold icon 83 of the special figure 2 is displayed behind the hold display section 511 in the power support (that is, behind the hold display section 511 at the rendering position). Therefore, even if the hold display unit 511 fails, the player can confirm the hold storage (hold display) of the special figure 2 by changing the viewpoint.

[Special figure 1 reservation notice setting processing]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 hold notice setting process according to the third embodiment of this invention. In the special figure 1 hold notice setting process of this embodiment, initial display information, final display information, and change suggestion notice information of the hold icon 83 are set.

  FIG. 128 is a view for explaining a pending change notice determination table 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. It is a figure explaining change notice decision table 2.

  The effect control device 300 first acquires stop symbol information of the target hold storage, and determines whether or not the stop symbol is a big hit symbol (B3706).

  If it is a big hit symbol (result of B3706 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines the final hold display mode based on hold change announcement determination table 1 shown in FIG. 128 (A) (B3707).

  If it is not a big hit symbol (result of B3706 is "N"), effect control device 300 determines the final hold display mode based on hold change announcement determination table 2 shown in FIG. 128 (B) (B3708).

Next, effect control device 300 sets the determined final hold display mode in the hold storage area of the target hold storage (B3709), and sets a hold change timing determination table corresponding to the final hold display mode (B3720). . The pending change timing determination table refers to Tables 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to (C).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines the hold change timing (hold change pattern) based on the number of holds (B3721), and stores the hold change timing information and the initial hold display mode in the hold storage area of the target hold memory. It is set (B3722).

  Next, effect controller 300 determines whether or not there is a change after the start winning (B3723). As described above, the case where there is a change after the start winning is a case where the initial display mode of the hold icon 83 displayed at the time of winning is different from the final display mode displayed at the time of digestion.

  If there is a change after the start winning (the result of B3723 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the information indicating the change suggestion mode in the hold storage area of the target hold memory (B3718), and performs this processing. To end. The change suggestion in the present embodiment is, for example, giving an effect to the hold icon 83 and gradation of the hold display unit 511.

  If there is no change after the start winning (the result of B3723 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines by lottery whether or not to use the change suggestion advance notice mode (B4201). It is determined whether or not the suggestion notice mode is executed (B4202).

  When the change suggestion notice mode is executed (result of B4202 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets information indicating the change suggestion mode in the hold storage area of the target hold storage (B3718), and The process ends.

  If the change suggestion notice mode is not executed (result of B4202 is “N”), effect control apparatus 300 sets information indicating no change suggestion mode in the hold storage area of the target hold storage (B3705), and executes this processing. To end.

  Note that when a winning of the special figure 2 occurs, the special figure 2 reservation notice setting processing is executed. However, since it is the same processing as the special figure 1 reservation notice setting processing, the illustration and the description are omitted.

[Hold display processing]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the hold display process according to the third embodiment of this invention. This process is a process of performing display control and the like of the hold icon 83 based on the information set in the special figure 1 hold notice setting processing and the special figure 2 hold notice setting processing.

  The effect control device 300 first displays the special figure 1 reserved storage number in the special figure 1 number reserved display area and the special figure 2 reserved storage number in the special figure 2 number reserved display area (B4301 and B4302).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the change has been started (B4303). If the change has not been started (result of B4303 is "N"), effect control device 300 causes hold display to be performed. Execution processing is executed (B4314), and this processing ends. The suspension display execution process is a process of displaying the suspension icon 83 based on the suspension display information and the change suggestion mode information. The hold icon 83 according to the present embodiment includes one of “white”, “white with effect”, “blue”, “blue with effect”, “red”, “red with effect”, and “rainbow”. Is displayed.

  If the fluctuation has started (the result of B4303 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the suspension change timing information in the suspension storage area of the suspension storage of the target special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is checked whether or not there is a reserved storage performed (B4304, B4305).

  If there is no hold storage in which the hold change timing information is set (result of B4305 is "N"), effect control device 300 executes a hold display execution process (B4314), and ends this process.

  When there is a hold storage in which the hold change timing information is set (result of B4305 is “Y”), effect control device 300 updates the corresponding hold display mode information based on the change notice timing information (B4306). .

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a changing pending icon 83 (B4307). If there is a changing pending icon 83 (result of B4307 is “Y”), output of a pending change sound is performed. Is set (B4308). When there are a plurality of changing holding icons 83, the output of the changing change sounds for the changing number may be set, or the output of the special changing change sound may be set.

  Next, effect control device 300 checks and determines whether or not there is a hold storage that changes to the final hold display mode (B4309, B4310).

  If there is a hold icon 83 that changes to the final hold display mode (result of B4310 is “Y”), effect control device 300 checks whether or not there is a hold memory being displayed in the gasp change suggestion mode, A determination is made (B4311, B4312).

  If there is no hold icon 83 that changes to the final hold display mode (the result of B4310 is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not display the change suggestion mode information in the hold storage area of the target hold storage. The information is changed to information (B4313), a suspended display execution process is executed (B4314), and this process ends.

  Further, when there is a pending storage being displayed in the gasp change suggestion mode (result of B4312 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes the processing of B4313 and B4314, and ends this processing.

  If there is no pending storage being displayed in the gasp change suggestion mode (result of B4312 is “N”), effect control device 300 executes the process of B4314, and ends this process.

[Accessory operation process]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the accessory operation process according to the third embodiment of this invention. This process is a process for setting operation information of the hold display unit 511 and the movable effect member 44.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the big hit is ending (B4401). If the big hit is ending (the result of B4401 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to shift to the power support state after the big hit end (B4402).

  When shifting to the power support state (result of B4402 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets holding display unit 510 to the second position (effect position) between movable effect member 44 and normal variable winning device 37. ) (B4403), and converts the antenna 44a from the first state to the second state (B4404).

If the big hit ending is not in progress (result of B4401 is “N”), or if it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the big hit (result of B4402 is “N”), effect control device 300
Since there is no need to set the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the movable effect member 44, the processing after B4405 is executed without executing the processing of B4403 and B4404.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the electric support state has ended (B4405). If the electric support state has ended (result of B4405 is "Y"), special drawing 2 It is determined whether or not there is a pending storage (B4406).

  If there is no hold storage of the special figure 2 (result of B4406 is “N”), effect control device 300 moves hold display unit 510 to the first position (B4407).

  If there is a reserved storage of the special figure 2 (result of B4406 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets an effect continuation flag (B4407). When the effect continuation flag is set, effect control device 300 maintains hold display unit 511 at the second position and maintains antenna 44a in the second state.

  In order to simplify the control, the hold display unit 510 may be returned to the first position in any state at the end of the power support state, or a predetermined number of games for which the power support state ends is reached. The hold display unit 510 may be returned to the first position before.

  If the power support state has not ended (the result of B4405 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the processing after B4409 without executing the processing from B4406 to B4408.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the effect continuation flag is set (B4409).

  When the effect continuation flag is set (result of B4409 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a hold storage of special figure 2 (B4410).

  When there is no hold storage of the special figure 2 (result of B4410 is “N”), the effect control device 300 moves the hold display unit 510 to the first position (B4411), and changes the antenna 44a from the second state to the second position. The state is converted to the 1 state (B4412).

  During the big hit, the hold display unit 510 may be returned to the first position even if the hold of the special figure 2 is stored.

  Next, the effect control device 300 sets the effect continuation flag to be cleared (B4313).

  If the effect continuation flag is not set (result of B4409 is “N”), or if there is a reserved storage of Tokujin Figure 2 (result of B4410 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 proceeds from B4411 to B4413. The processing after B4414 is executed without executing the processing.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current state is the non-electric support state (B4414).

If the current state is not the non-power support state, that is, if the power support state is in effect (result of B4414 is “N”), effect control device 300 has notice target hold storage in standby hold storage areas 363 to 366. It is checked whether it is or not (B4415, B4416). The notice target hold memory is a hold memory in which information for executing an operation effect of moving the movable effect member 44 so as to drop from the initial position above the display device 41 to the operation position in front of the display device 41 is set.

  Only when there is a notice mode hold storage (result of B4416 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes a drop suggestion effect of moving movable effect member 44 (B4417).

  Next, effect controller 300 determines whether or not the fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 has started (B4418). If the fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 has started (the result of B4418 is "Y"), the effect is produced. The control device 300 determines whether or not the suspension notice of the special figure 2 in which the change is started is the suspension memory for the advance notice (B4419).

  In the case of the notice-holding storage (the result of B4419 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the running variation display game is a variation pattern with a high reliability of SP2 reach or higher. (B4420).

  If it is equal to or more than SP2 reach (the result of B4420 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes a drop effect in which the movable effecting member 44 is moved from the initial position to the operating position and then returns to the initial position. (B4421), and ends this process. Note that the drop effect may be any of the start of fluctuation, the time of SP reach development, the last scene of the reach effect, and the like.

  When the change in Tokuzu 2 has not started (the result of B4418 is “N”), the executed hold storage is not the notice target hold storage (the result of B4419 is “N”), and the SP2 reach or more is not reached. (The result of B4420 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  On the other hand, when the current state is the non-power support state (result of B4414 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the fluctuation of special figure 1 has started (B4422).

  When the variation of the special figure 1 is started (the result of B4422 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the active variation display game is equal to or more than SP reach ( (B4423), only when it is equal to or greater than the SP reach (the result of B4423 is "Y"), the fall effect execution timing is determined according to the big hit expectation (reliability) (B4424).

  Next, effect controller 300 determines whether or not the current time is a drop effect execution timing (B4425). If it is a fall timing (result of B4425 is "Y"), drop by movable effect member 44 is performed. An effect is performed (B4426), and this process ends. The drop production may be at the start of fluctuation, at the time of SP reach development, the last scene of the reach production, or the like.

  If it is not the drop timing (the result of B4425 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this processing.

  Note that the difference between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is determined in B4418 and B4422, but the drop effect of the movable effect member 44 is executed without determining whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is used. You may.

  In addition, even in the non-electric support state, there is a case where a long opening in which the normal variable winning device 37 is opened for a long period of time is executed. The unit 510 may be moved to the second position.

(Direction light emitting unit lighting process)
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect light emitting unit lighting process according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the reserved storage area in the special drawings 1 and 2 according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hold display unit 510 is at the first position (B4501). If it is at the first position (result of B4501 is “Y”), The hold display mode information of the standby hold storage areas 363 to 366 is acquired (B4502).

  In the first case (the result of B4501 is “N”), the effect control device 300 acquires the suspension display mode information of the standby suspension storage areas 373 to 376 of the special figure 2 (B4503).

  Next, effect control device 300 turns on each hold display section 511 based on the acquired hold display mode information (B4504), and determines whether or not a drop effect is currently being executed (B4505).

  When the drop effect is being executed (result of B4505 is "Y"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the variable display game of Tokuju 1 is being executed (B4506). Only (the result of B4506 is “Y”), the suspension display mode information of the digestion suspension storage area 362 of the special figure 1 is acquired (B4507).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variable display game of Toku-zu 2 is being executed (B4508), and only if it is being executed (the result of B4508 is “Y”), , The hold display mode information of the digest hold storage area 372 is acquired (B4509).

  Next, effect controller 300 turns on movable effect member 44 based on the acquired hold display mode information (B4510), and ends the present process.

  On the other hand, when the drop effect is not being executed (the result of B4505 is “N”), the effect with high reliability is not executed, and therefore the effect control device 300 sets the movable effect member based on the default hold display mode information. The light 44 is turned on in the white mode (B4511), and this process ends.

[Explanation of the operation of the movable staging member and the hold display section during the electric support]
FIG. 133A and FIG. 133B are transition diagrams illustrating the operation of the movable effect member 44 and the hold display unit 511 in the electric support according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 133A shows a state in which the movable piece 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, and a game ball is about to win the special winning start-up winning opening 37d. The normal fluctuation prize device 37 itself is lit while the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is open, and a circle mark is lit when the result of the normal fluctuation display game (common game) is a hit. The reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is “2”, and the reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is “1”. The special icon 1 hold icons 83a and 83b are displayed on the lower side of the display device 41, and the special icon 2 hold icon 83 is displayed on the back of the hold display unit 511. Therefore, even when the hold display unit 511 is turned off due to a failure, the player can check the hold icon 83 displayed on the back of the hold display unit 511 by changing the viewpoint.

  The movable effect member 44 emits light in a white mode, and notifies the degree of expectation of the variable display game of the special figure 2 being executed. Since the electric support is being performed, the antenna 44a of the movable effect member 44 is operating upward.

(B) shows that the start memory of the special map 2 is stored because a new start prize is generated in the special map 2,
This shows a state in which the second hold display unit 511b is lit in a white mode. In addition, the display device 41 displays a change suggestion advance effect on the second special figure 2 hold icon 83f, and the variable display game corresponding to the start memory of the special figure 2 based on the new start prize has a special result. It reports that the degree is high. The change suggestion notice effect is not displayed on the periphery of the hold icon 83, but may be a display mode in which the hold icon 83 blinks. In addition, the movable effect member 44 repeatedly moves up and down in small increments, and notifies that the reliability of the new winning is high. The gradual up-and-down movement of the movable effect member 44 is continued until the reliability of the highly-reserved hold memory is finally notified. In addition, since the normal game has been lost, the X mark of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is lit.

  (C) shows a state in which the result of the variable display game being executed has been determined.

  (D) shows a state in which a new variable display game of special figure 2 has been started. The second hold storage, which is displayed in white on the second hold display unit 511b and displayed with an effect behind, is displayed in blue on the first hold display 511a. In addition, since the more accurate reliability is notified in the hold display unit 511, the effect is disappeared in the special figure 2 hold icon 83 at the rear. The small up and down movement of the movable effect member 44 continues. In the present embodiment, the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is executed with priority over the reserved storage of the special figure 1.

  (E) shows a state in which the movable piece 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened and a game ball is about to win the special drawing 2 starting winning opening 37d. The small up and down movement of the movable effect member 44 continues.

  (F) shows a state in which the start memory of the special figure 2 is stored due to the occurrence of a new start prize in the special figure 2, and the second hold display unit 511b is lit in a white mode. The small up and down movement of the movable effect member 44 continues.

  (G) of FIG. 133B shows a state in which the result of the variable display game being executed has been determined. The small up and down movement of the movable effect member 44 continues.

  (H) shows a state in which a new variable display game of special figure 2 has been started. Since the hold storage that has been emitting light in the blue mode is performed, the movable effect member 44 also emits light in the blue mode. Although the up-and-down movement of the movable effect member 44 is continuing, the operation mode of the movable effect member 44 may be different at the moment when the high-reliability hold storage is executed.

  After that, it is divided into (I1) and (I2) depending on whether the movable effect member 44 has a drop effect.

  (I1) shows a state where the movable effect member 44 is stationary while emitting light in the blue mode. For example, when the reliability of the big hit is low, such as when the reach of SP1 or less is executed, the movable effect member 44 stops the vertical movement in small increments, and notifies that the reliability is low.

  (I2) shows a state where the movable effect member 44 has suddenly moved downward so as to drop. For example, when the reliability of the big hit is high, for example, when the reach of SP2 reach or more is executed, the movable effect member 44 executes the drop effect, and notifies that the reliability is high.

  As described above, when the fluctuation display game of the hold memory with high reliability is executed, the movable effect member 44 imitating the face of the insect performs the drop effect, thereby providing the player with unexpectedness and playability. Can be.

When the overflow prize of the special figure 2 occurs, the six luminous bodies from the movable effect member 44 to the normal fluctuation prize device 37 are integrally increased in brightness, or a green and rainbow green rainbow effect is integrated. May be displayed in a special display mode such as. In addition, when the hold memory of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 overflows, the privilege itself which makes the eyes of the player entertain in the overflow itself, for example, the antenna 44a moves up and down, and the size of the hold icon 83 temporarily increases. It may be performed.

(Effects of Third Embodiment)
As described above, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the arrangement of the hold display unit 511 changes during non-power support and during power support. Therefore, the player can grasp the state of the game by the movement of the hold display unit 511 (depending on the arrangement), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, during the non-electric support, when the hold display unit 511 at the position (first position) corresponding to the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36 becomes the electric support state. Move to a position (second position) corresponding to the special winning start port 37d. Therefore, the player's line of sight during non-electric support and during electric support can be easily determined, and the player can concentrate on the game. Further, when the hold display unit 511 is at the first position, the decoration device 46 imitating the face of the caterpillar and the hold display unit 511 are connected to each other to look like a lovely potato, but when the hold display unit 511 is at the second position. , The holding display unit 511 is connected to the movable effect member (movable member) 44 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and looks like a strong green worm that stands up by taking a scale. Therefore, by moving the hold display unit 510, it is possible to provide a playability to entertain the player's eyes, and to give the player a comical impression by the movement of the movable piece 37 b of the ordinary variable prize device 37.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the hold display unit 511 emits light as the hold storage (hold display) of the special figure 1 when in the first position, and emits light when in the second position. Emits light as a hold storage (hold display) of the special figure 2. Therefore, the player can recognize whether the reserved memory of Toku-zu 1 is easily digested or the reserved memory of Toku-zu 2 is easily digested, and the progress of the game can be easily understood.

  According to the third embodiment of the present invention, the special figure 1 reserved number display section 89a for displaying the reserved number of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 89b for displaying the reserved number of the special figure 2 are provided. Is provided. Therefore, it is possible to specify both the number of holds of the special figure 1 and the number of holds of the special figure 2 that cannot be specified from the hold display in the hold display unit 511.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, when there is a high possibility that a special result is obtained, a drop effect (movement effect) by the movable effect member (movable member) 44 is executed. Further, when the hold display unit 511 is at the second position, the light emission is performed at a position closer to the movable effect member 44 as the hold memory having the earlier digestion order is stored. Therefore, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation that the movable effect member 44 operates during the variable display game.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, when the hold display unit 511 is at the second position, the hold memory having a later digestion order emits light at a position closer to the special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d. Therefore, the process of executing the variable display game can be easily understood, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the hold display section 511 corresponding to the hold storage with high reliability is displayed in a notice display mode according to the reliability. Therefore, the holding light in the advance display mode moves toward the movable effect member 44, so that the sense of expectation for the variable display game can be effectively improved.

[Modification 1 of Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment, when a new prize is generated, the first hold display section 511a and the second hold display section 511b are displayed in this order. On the other hand, in the first modification of the third embodiment, when a new prize is generated during the power support, first, the fourth hold display unit 511d is turned on, and then the hold display unit 511 is moved upward. As described above, each hold display section 511 lights up and displays.

[Description of lighting operation of hold display section]
FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating a lighting operation of the hold display unit 511 according to the first modification of the third embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 134A shows a state in which the first hold display section 511a emits light and there is one hold memory in Toku-zu.

  (B) shows a state in which the movable piece 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened.

  (C) shows a state in which a game ball is about to win a special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d.

  (D) shows a state in which the new winning is displayed on the fourth hold display unit 511d as a red mode having high reliability. Here, the fourth holding display section 511d may emit light simultaneously with the winning, or the fourth holding display section 511d may emit light after the movable piece 37b is closed and the normal variable winning apparatus 37 is turned off. Alternatively, since a plurality of game balls may win while the movable piece 37b is being opened at one time, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is turned off once every time a winning occurs in the special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d. , The fourth hold display section 511d may emit light. When the fourth suspension display section 511d emits light after the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is turned off, a state in which the light emission of the suspension memory moves sequentially can be produced with a sense of unity.

  (E) shows a state in which the fourth hold display unit 511d is turned off and the third hold display unit 511c emits light in a red mode.

  (F) shows a state in which the third hold display unit 511c is turned off and the second hold display unit 511b emits light in a red mode.

  As described above, in this modified example, when a prize is generated in the special figure 2, the light-emitting portion representing the hold storage moves in the order of the normal variable prize winning device 37, the fourth hold display portion 511d, and the third hold display portion 511c. Note that the hold display unit 511 of the movement source and the hold display unit 511 of the movement destination may move little by little at the timing when the hold display unit 511 that emits light moves.

(Effects of Modification Example 1 of Third Embodiment)
As described above, in the first modification of the third embodiment of the present invention, when the winning of the special figure 2 occurs, the normal variable winning device 37, the fourth holding display unit 511d, and the third holding display unit 511c are arranged in this order. Each of the hold display units 511 sequentially emits light. Therefore, when a highly reliable hold storage occurs, the sense of expectation as a special result can be effectively improved.

  In addition, a sense of unity is brought to the six light-emitting bodies connected from the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the movable effect member 44.

[Modification 2 of Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment, the hold display section 511 has a round shape and has a shape that emits light on one side, and the hold icon 83 at the rear cannot be directly viewed in a front view. On the other hand, in the second modification of the third embodiment, the hold display section 511 has a donut shape so that the rear hold icon 83 can be directly visually recognized.

  FIG. 135 is a front view of the hold display unit 510 in a state where the hold display unit 511 according to the second modification of the third embodiment of the present invention has not failed.

  FIG. 136 is a front view of the hold display unit 510 of the second modification of the third embodiment of the present invention in a state where the second hold display unit 511b is out of order.

  In FIG. 135, the first hold display section 511a emits light in a white mode, and the first special figure 2 hold icon 83e behind it also emits light in a white mode. Further, the second suspension display portion 511b emits light in a blue mode, and the second special figure 2 suspension icon 83f behind the second suspension display section 511b emits light in a blue mode with an effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 136, the second hold display section 511b is turned off due to a failure, and the second special figure 2 hold icon 83f behind it is illuminated in a blue mode with an effect.

  As described above, in the present modification, since the opening is provided in the hold display unit 511, the player can visually recognize the hold icon 83 at the rear without changing the viewpoint. In particular, even if the hold icon 83 does not emit light due to a failure, the hold icon 83 can be visually recognized directly, so that the player can check the actual number of holds and the reliability of the hold storage.

  Note that the central portion of the hold display portion 511 may be formed of a translucent member whose rear is visible instead of the opening.

(Effects of Modification 2 of Third Embodiment)
As described above, according to the second modification of the third embodiment of the present invention, since the opening is provided in the hold display unit 511, the player can change the hold icon 83 at the rear without changing the viewpoint. It is possible to see it.

  In addition, even if the hold icon 83 does not emit light due to a failure, the player can check the actual number of holds and the reliability of the hold storage without changing the viewpoint. There is no need to interrupt the game or avoid the gaming machine 10 for the reason.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the first to third embodiments, the reserved memory (starting memory) of the special figure 2 is digested with priority over the reserved memory (starting memory) of the special figure 1, so the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is digested in the storage order. After that, the reserved storage of Toku-zu 1 is digested in the order of storage. Further, the hold display unit 511 has always performed an effect such as light emission as a hold memory separately from the hold icon 83. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the winning order of the start winning prize of Toku-zu 1 and the starting prize of Toku-zu 2 is stored, and the reservation storage (start-up memory) of Toku-zu 1 and the holding of The memorization (starting memory) is stored in the winning order (memory order). In addition, the rendering unit 521 corresponding to the hold display unit 511 executes a performance such as light emission as a decorative member or a hold memory depending on a game state.

(Game board)
FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the gaming board 30 of the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the warp device 42 is provided only on the left side of the center case 40, and four general winning openings 35 are provided in the gaming area 32 on the left side. .

The game area 32 on the right side has, in order from the top, a general figure starting gate 34, a normal fluctuation winning device 37, and a fluctuation in which the opening / closing member is operated at the time of the big hit of the special figure fluctuation display game to open the attacker (upper grand prize opening) for a predetermined period. A winning device 38 is provided. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the movable piece 37b is opened at the time of the normal figure fluctuation display game, so that the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d can be won.

  In the lower game area 32, a special drawing 1 starting winning port 36, a special figure 2 starting winning port 37d, and a starting winning port unit 33 including a winning distribution mechanism 48 and the like are provided. The starting winning opening unit 33 includes a special drawing 1 starting winning opening 36, a special drawing 2 starting winning opening 37d, a winning distribution mechanism 48 for distributing game balls to the starting winning opening of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, a ball opening 33c, An eaves portion 33b is provided for restricting a game ball from flowing down to the inner game area 32.

  The start winning opening unit 33 includes a special figure 1 starting winning opening 36 at a lower right portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 33a, and a special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d at a lower left portion of the base portion 33a. In addition, an eave portion 33b is provided on the upper side of the base portion 33a in a bowl-like shape having a swelling outward to restrict the flow of the game ball into the inside. The end of the eaves portion 33b terminates at a position slightly closer to the center of the base portion 33a. For this reason, between the end of the eaves portion 33b and the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36, a right opening 33d is formed from the right side of the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36 with a width that allows a game ball to win. A left opening 33e having a similar width is formed on the left side of the starting winning opening unit 33.

  In the center of the eaves portion 33b, there is provided a ball entrance 33c for letting game balls pass, and the eaves portion 33c causes the eaves portion 33b to have a right eaves portion 33b1 (see FIG. 138) and a left eaves portion 33b2 (see FIG. 138). ). An obstruction nail 32a (see FIG. 138) is disposed at a position approximately the same height as the terminal end of the right eaves portion 33b1 and outside the base portion 33a and in contact with the base portion 33a. Further, the obstacle nail 32a is arranged at a height substantially equal to that of the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36, outside the base portion 33a and at a position in contact with the base portion. Therefore, obstacle nails 32a are arranged just above and below the right opening 33d at the upper and lower positions, and the game ball flowing down near the right opening 33d passes between the upper and lower obstacle nails 32a, and the After passing through the opening 33d, it is possible to win the special drawing 1 starting winning opening 36 from the right side. A similar obstruction nail 32a is disposed in the left opening 33e, however, since it is disposed at a position symmetrical to the right obstruction nail 32a, the description is omitted.

  Since the entrance 33c is provided at the center of the upper part of the start winning opening unit 33, the game ball passing through the entrance 33c flows down (flows) into the inside of the start winning opening unit 33 (inside the game area 32). ). Just below the entrance 33c and in the center of the starting winning opening unit 33, a game ball passing through the entrance 33c and falling substantially vertically is a special winning start 36 or special FIG. A winning distribution mechanism 48 for distributing to the starting winning opening 37d is provided. Note that a guide port 43a of the stage 43 is provided directly above the entrance port 33c.

  In addition, on the right edge of the center case 40 between the ordinary figure starting gate 34 and the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37, a special figure 1 fluctuation display LED 66 and a special figure 2 fluctuation display LED 67 are arranged in order from the top.

  Inside the center case 40, a movable effecting member 44 imitating an insect face, a display device 41, a warping device 42, and a stage 43 are arranged in order from the top. The stage 43 extends in the left-right direction at the bottom of the center case 40. Eight rendering units 521a to 521h are provided on the left and right of the display device 41.

  In the gaming board 30 of the present embodiment, a right-handed hit during a normal operation, a right-handed hit during a big hit and during a power support (during a probable change, during a shortened working hour) is an advantageous hitting method for a player. In the special figure 1 start winning prize port 36, a game ball flowing down during right hitting can be awarded from the right opening 33d, so that the reserved memory of the special figure 1 can be increased even during electric support.

  It should be noted that the special distribution in the special figure 2 is more advantageous for the player than the special figure 1 in the round allocation at the time of the big hit.

[Start winning opening unit]
FIG. 138 is a front view of the start winning opening unit 33 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. In this drawing, the winning distribution mechanism 48 will be described.

  The winning distribution mechanism 48 includes a rotating member 48b that rotates about the rotating shaft 48a with respect to the start winning opening unit 33 main body, and a stopper member 48c that stops the rotation of the rotating member 48b. The rotating member 48b has an extending portion extending in three directions from the rotating shaft 48a. The three extending portions include a right bottom portion 48b1, a left bottom portion 48b2, and an upright portion 48b3 that stands up with respect to the left bottom portion 48b2 and the right bottom portion 48b1.

  FIG. 138 (A) shows a first state (right inclined state) in which the right bottom portion 48b1 of the rotated rotating member 48b is stopped in contact with the upper right side portion of the stopper member 48c. When the prize distribution mechanism 48 is in the first state, the game ball having entered from the entrance 33c flows down to the L-shaped accommodation portion 48d defined by the left bottom portion 48b2 and the upright portion 48b3.

  Then, as shown in (B), the rotating member 48b rotates counterclockwise due to the load of the game ball. The winning distribution mechanism 48 is in a second state (left tilt state) in which the left bottom portion 48b2 of the rotated rotating member 48b is stopped in contact with the upper left portion of the stopper member 48c. At this time, the game balls in the housing portion 48d flow down to the left side (the side of the special drawing 2 starting winning opening 37d) and are sorted. In addition, the game ball flowing down from the housing portion 48d to the starting winning opening does not win depending on how to bounce with the rotating member 48b or the manner of contact with the upper end of the opening of the starting winning opening 36, 37, and the side opening. (Left opening 33e or right opening 33d) may jump to the outer game area 32.

  (C) shows a state in which a game ball that has entered the winning distribution mechanism 48 in the second state from the entrance 33c flows down to the accommodation portion 48d.

  (D) shows a state in which the distribution member is rotated clockwise by the load of the game ball accommodated in the accommodation section 48d. The right bottom portion 48b1 of the rotated distributing member comes into contact with the upper right side portion of the stopper member 48c and stops in the first state. Can be

  In this way, the winning distribution mechanism 48 alternates the game balls entering from the entrance 33c with the load of the game balls on the right side (special figure 1 starting winning opening 36 side) and the left side (special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d). Side). Therefore, when there is a game ball that has passed through the entrance 33c, unless the game ball jumps out from the right opening 33d or the left opening 33e to the outside, the starting prize (starting memory) and the special figure 2 in FIG. Start prize (start memory) occurs alternately.

[First gaming state and second gaming state]
FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of the first game state and the second game state according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 140 is a front view of the inside of the center case 40 in the first game state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 141 is a front view of the inside of the center case 40 in the second game state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the rendering method of the rendering unit 521 is changed by dividing the gaming state into a first gaming state and a second gaming state. For example, in the first game state, a pre-reading effect by the effect unit 521 is not executed, and a light-emitting effect is executed as the decoration device 46. In the second game state, a pre-reading effect of start memory by the effect unit 521 is executed.

  As the first gaming state and the second gaming state, nine combinations are conceivable as shown in FIG. 139 as an example, and in the present embodiment, any one of the nine combinations may be fixedly selected. Alternatively, it may be fluidly selected so that the combination changes.

  In the first combination, the normal gaming state is the first gaming state, and the probable changing gaming state is the second gaming state.

  In the second combination, the normal gaming state is the first gaming state, and the time reduction gaming state is the second gaming state.

  In the third combination, the time-saving gaming state is the first gaming state, and the certainty-changing gaming state is the second gaming state.

  In the fourth combination, the clear probability state is the first game state, and the probability ambiguity state is the second game state. The clear probability state is, for example, a state in which the player can clearly recognize that the player is in the probability change game state or the normal game state, and the probability ambiguity state is, for example, that the player is in the probability change game state or the normal game state. The state is unknown to the person.

  In the fifth combination, the non-electric support state is the first game state, and the electric support state is the second game state.

  In the sixth combination, the specific hold non-storage state is the first game state, and the specific hold storage state is the second game state. The specific reserved storage is, for example, a reserved storage that becomes a big hit.

  In the seventh combination, the first effect mode is the first game state, and the second effect mode is the second game state. The effect mode can be divided, for example, for each effect theme.

  In the eighth combination, the first variable time mode is the first gaming state, and the second variable time mode is the second gaming state.

  In the ninth combination, the normal fluctuation display state is the first game state, and the pseudo continuous fluctuation display state is the second game state.

  In the first gaming state, as shown in FIG. 140, the movable effect member 44 stays at the upper portion of the display device 41, and the effect portion 521 emits light at an initial position (standby position, first position) outside the display device 41. Execute. In the first game state, effect unit 521 does not execute the movement effect.

  On the screen of the display device 41, a variable display area 79 in which a special symbol is displayed is provided from the top of the screen to the middle of the screen. At the lower part of the screen, for example, a standby hold display area 80 for displaying a hold icon 83 or the like is provided on the left side, and a specific effect area 81 for displaying an effect by a character or the like is provided on the right side. At the bottom center of the screen is provided a digestion suspension display area 88 in which suspension storage during execution of the variable display game is displayed.

The standby hold display area 80 is configured by an upper and lower area. Lower row is hold icon 8
A reserved icon display area 80b for displaying a reserved icon 3 and the like is provided. The upper row shows an identification icon for displaying, by a small icon, whether the reserved storage (starting storage) is the reserved storage of Toku-zu 1 or the reserved storage of Toku-zu 2. A display area 80a is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 80b below the standby hold display area 80, in addition to the hold icon 83, a concealed shutter image and a schedule icon 85 described later are displayed. The concealed shutter image 86 is for filling an empty area of the hold icon display area 80b, and the schedule icon 85 indicates a place where the hold icon 83 will be displayed next when a start winning (hold hold) occurs. Is an icon for

  In the second game state, as shown in FIG. 141, the effect unit 521 moves to the effect position (operation position, second position) in front of the display device 41, and emits light and turns off as a hold memory (hold display). Performs effects such as swaying motion. The effect position is a position outside the movable effect member 44 that has moved to the front of the display device 41, and has a positional relationship in which the effect portion 521 does not collide with the movable effect member 44.

  In this embodiment, the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not preferentially digested, but is digested in the order of winning (the order of storage). It becomes the display unit of the storage 8 to the storage 8 (the eighth storage). In addition, the movable effect member 44 serves as a display unit of the hold memory during the execution of the special figure change display game, and the specific effect area 81 serves as a special figure type display unit indicating the type of the special figure of each hold memory.

  In addition, the left production unit 521 and the right production unit 521 may be united to perform operation control with a sense of unity, or the left production unit 521 and the right production unit 521 may be a plurality of units.

[Read-ahead command processing]
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of prefetch command processing according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. In the look-ahead command processing of the first embodiment, the special notice 1 and the special figure 2 are set separately to set the suspension notice or the continuous notice, that is, the pre-reading effect, but in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 and the special figure are set. It is set without dividing FIG.

  When the variation command and the symbol type match (the result of B3603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes a suspension notice setting process and a continuous notice setting process (B4601, B4602), and ends this process. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reservation memory (starting memory) of the special figure 1 and the reservation memory (starting memory) of the special figure 2 are digested in order of winning (storage order). Instead, the pre-reading effect of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is set. Note that the pre-reading effect of one of the special figures may not be set according to the presence or absence of the electric support state.

[Hold icon]
FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating the hold icon 83 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating the normal system hold icon, and FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating the special system hold icon. is there.

The normal hold icon is the same as in the other embodiments, and a description thereof will be omitted. The special system reserve icon is different from the first to third modes in that, in order to inform the player of a more special feeling, the center of the triangular icon informs the player of the special reach of “SP”, special 3 "SP3" for advance notice of development to reach, "SP" for displaying advance notice, "Sudden" for sudden sudden change (2R probability big hit), and "Sure" for notice that big hit is confirmed to occur A hold icon 83 such as a hit notice hold display is prepared. Among them, when the hold icon 83 of the development notice hold display is displayed in the effect part 521, the light is displayed in yellow, and when the hold icon 83 of hit notice hold display is displayed in the effect part 521, the light is green. Is displayed.

[Hold notice setting process]
FIG. 144 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the reservation notice setting process according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. In the reservation notice setting process of the present embodiment, the same hitting table is set for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the table for the special figure 2 having a lower announcement effect execution ratio than that for the special figure 1 is used for the off-line. Is set. The notice effect is a normal hold notice in which the display mode does not change based on the execution of the preceding variable display game, or a step-up (SU) hold notice in which the display mode changes based on the execution of the preceding variable display game.

  FIG. 145 is a view for explaining a pending change notice determination table according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 4B is a diagram for explaining a change-of-hold reservation notice table 2 for a special event shown in FIG.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure type of the target hold storage is the special figure 1 (B4701).

  When the special figure type is the special figure 1 (result of B4701 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 acquires the stop symbol information of the target hold memory and determines whether or not the stop symbol is the big hit symbol. Is determined (B3706).

  In the case of the big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 displays the final hold based on the “hold change notice determination table 1” which is a hit table common to the special map 1 and the special map 2. The mode is determined (B3707). As shown in FIG. 145 (A), the pending change announcement determination table 1 is a table in which the execution ratio of the announcement effect is high. In this embodiment, in addition to the SP reach common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the special figure 1 limited SP reach limited to the special figure 1 (special figure 1 unique event) and the special figure limited SP reach limited to the special figure 2 (Special figure 2 unique event) is prepared. When the limited SP reach is selected, the pending change notice is not executed.

  If it is not a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the final hold display mode based on the “hold change announcement notice determination table 2” which is the outlier table of the special figure 1. (B3708). As shown in FIG. 145 (B), the pending change announcement determination table 2 is a table in which the execution ratio of the announcement effect is medium.

  On the other hand, when the special figure type is not the special figure 1 (the result of B4701 is “N”), the effect control device 300 acquires the stop symbol information of the target hold storage, and the stop symbol is the big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not it is (B3706).

  In the case of the big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 displays the final hold based on the “hold change notice determination table 1” which is a hit table common to the special map 1 and the special map 2. The mode is determined (B3707).

If it is not a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the final hold display mode based on the “hold change announcement determination table 3”, which is the outlier table of the special figure 2. (B4702). As shown in FIG. 145 (C), the pending change announcement determination table 3 is a table in which the execution ratio of the announcement effect is low.

  Following the setting of the pending change notice determination table (B3707, B3708, B4702), the effect control device 300 sets the determined final pending display mode in the pending storage area of the targeted pending storage (B3709), and becomes the target. It is determined whether or not the final hold icon in the hold storage is in the advance notice mode (B3710).

  If the final hold icon is in the notice mode (result of B3710 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines by lottery whether to use the normal hold notice or the step-up (SU) hold notice (B4703). ).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the suspension notice is a step-up (SU) suspension notice (B4704).

  If the lottery result of the reservation notice is a step-up (SU) reservation notice (result of B4704 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the step-up (SU) reservation notice information in the corresponding reservation storage area. (B4705), and executes the processing after B3720. In the case of the step-up (SU) suspension advance notice, since the display mode of the suspension display changes, information indicating a change suggestion advance notice may be set in the processing after B3720.

  If the lottery result of the hold notice is not a step-up (SU) hold notice (result of B4704 is "N"), effect control device 300 sets normal hold notice information in the corresponding hold storage area (B4706). , B3703 and thereafter. If it is not a step-up (SU) suspension notice, there is no possibility that the display mode of the suspension display will change. Therefore, in the processing after B3703, information indicating no change suggestion notice is set.

  On the other hand, when the final hold icon is not in the advance notice mode (result of B3710 is “N”), effect control device 300 executes the processing after B3704. When the final hold icon is not in the notice mode, the change suggestion no notice information is set except for the effect setting of the gasket.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the same pending change notice determination table 1 is set in the case where the to-be-held storage of the toll map 1 and the toll map 2 is a hit. In addition, if the target hold memory is missing, the special change 1 is set to the hold change advance notice determination table 2 in which the execution ratio of the notice effect is medium, and the special change 2 is the hold change notice in which the execute ratio of the notice effect is low. The decision table 3 is set.

  The execution ratio of the notice effect may be set to a low value in the pending change notice determination table 2 and set to a moderate value in the hold change notice determination table 3. On the other hand, when the limited SP reach is selected, the hold change notice is not executed on the one hand, and on the other hand, the hold change notice is executed when the limited SP reach is selected. You may.

[Hold display processing]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the hold display process according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. In the hold display processing of the present embodiment, the display processing of the identification icon 84, the display processing of the concealed shutter image 86, and the like are added to the procedure of the hold display processing of the first embodiment.

  Subsequent to the processing from B3801 to B3812, the production control device 300 executes a reserve icon display processing (B4801), an identification icon display processing (B4802), a scheduled icon display processing (B4803), and a concealed shutter image display processing (B4804). .

  The hold icon display process is a process of setting (displaying) each hold icon 83 and an effect based on the number of stored holds, the hold icon display information, and the change suggestion advance notice information.

  The identification icon display process is a process of displaying the special figure 1 identification icon 84a above the special figure 1 reservation icon 83 and displaying the special figure 2 identification icon 84b above the special figure 2 reservation icon 83.

  The schedule icon display process is a process of displaying a schedule icon 85 indicating an area (position) where the hold icon 83 is displayed next.

  The concealed shutter image display process is a process of displaying a concealed shutter image 86 for concealing (a part of) an empty area in which the reserved icon 83 is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 80b.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current game state is the second game state (B4805), and only when the game state is the second game state (result of B4805 is "Y"), digestion order information display processing is performed. (B4806). After that, the process ends.

  The digestion order information display process is a process of displaying information related to the digestion order of the special figure 1 hold storage (startup memory) and the special figure 2 hold storage (startup memory) in the specific effect area 81. In the second game state, the concealment shutter conceals the entire holding icon display area 80b, so that information on the digestion order is displayed in the specific effect area 81. In the second gaming state, the identification icon 84 may or may not be displayed in the identification icon display area 80a.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 147 is a screen transition diagram for explaining the transition of the hold display according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, centering on the standby hold display area 80.

  FIG. 147 (A) shows a state in which two special figure 1 hold memories and two special figure 2 hold memories are displayed in the first game state. Since the reserved icon 83 is displayed in the same form in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the player cannot determine from the reserved icon 83 whether the storage of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is stored. Therefore, when the identification icons 84 displayed in the identification icon display area 80a are confirmed, two special figure 1 identification icons 84a each displaying a numeral 1 in a hexagonal frame and a numeral 2 in a round frame are displayed. Are displayed, two of the special figure 2 identification icons 84b are displayed. Therefore, it is determined whether the reservation icon 83 displayed in the reservation icon display area 80b is the storage of the special figure 1 or the storage of the special figure 2. be able to.

  In the digestion hold display area 88, the currently held hold storage is displayed, and the hold icons 83 are sequentially digested from the right side. The icons displayed in the digestion suspension display area 88 are also displayed as the same form of icons in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but since the identification icon 84 is not displayed, it is not possible to determine whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is used. Can not.

  At the lower left of the fourth holding icon 83d from the right, a schedule icon 85 is displayed. The schedule icon 85 indicates the position where the next hold icon 83 is displayed. Next, since the scheduled icon 85 is displayed at the position where the reserved icon 83 is displayed, the upper limit of the reserved number has not been reached, and it is possible to intuitively inform the player that the reserved number can be increased.

Further, a concealed shutter image 86 is displayed from the left end of the reserved icon display area 80b to the left side of the schedule icon 85. The concealed shutter image 86 is an image for concealing a vacant area where the hold icon 83 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 80b, and slides in the left-right direction like a shutter according to the increase or decrease of the hold icon 83.

  The concealment range when four or more hold icons 83 are displayed in the first gaming state is a range with a space for one hold icon, and the concealment range when three or less hold icons 83 are displayed is , A space with a space for two reserved icons. As described above, since the concealed shutter image 86 moves in accordance with the change in the number of reservations, the vacant area of the reservation icon display area 80b becomes inconspicuous.

  (B) shows a state in which a new prize has occurred in the special figure 2 and the hold icon 83 in the blue mode with effect is displayed. Above the reserved icon 83, a special figure 2 identification icon 84b is displayed. In addition, since the fifth hold icon 83e is displayed, the schedule icon 85 and the concealment shutter image 86 have moved leftward by one hold icon.

  (C) shows a state where the reserved memory is newly digested. In addition, since the display of the fifth hold icon 83e disappears, the schedule icon 85 and the concealment shutter image 86 have moved to the right by one. In the digestion suspension display area 88, since the identification icon 84 is not displayed for the suspension storage being executed (the suspension icon 83 displayed in a large size), whether the suspension storage to be executed is the special map 2 of the advantageous round distribution. It is possible to entertain the variable display game without making the player aware of the special map 1 of the disadvantageous round distribution.

  (D) shows a state in which the hold storage is further exhausted, and the hold icon 83 displayed in the blue mode with effect is stepped up and displayed in the red mode with effect. The schedule icon 85 has moved to the right from (C), but the number of reservations is three or less, and the concealed shutter image 86 does not move because there is a space for two reservation icons. When the number of holdings decreases, the concealment shutter image 86 does not hide more than a certain holding icon, so that the player can be given an impression that the number of holdings has decreased and the person is lonely. Therefore, the player can be motivated to increase the number of holdings and turn around the lonely situation of the holding icon display area 80b. In the second gaming state, it is not necessary to execute the suspension change notice by the suspension icon 83.

(Director operation process)
FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the rendering unit operation processing according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. This process is a process of setting the operation mode of the production unit according to the production state of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is the first gaming state (B4901).

  If it is the first gaming state (result of B4901 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the effect part is at the effect position (B4902), and if it is at the effect position (B4902). Only when the result is “Y”), the effect unit 521 is moved to the initial position located on the side of the display device 41 (B4903).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the fluctuation display game is being executed (B4904), and only when the fluctuation display game is being executed (the result of B4904 is “Y”) based on the current fluctuation scene. The lighting mode of each effect unit 521 and movable effect member 44 is determined (B4905), and each effect unit 521 is turned on in the determined lighting mode (B4906).

On the other hand, if the current game state is not the first gaming state (result of B4901 is “N”), effect control device 300 does not execute the processing from B4902 to B4906 but executes the processing after B4907.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the second gaming state (B4907).

  If the current gaming state is the second gaming state (result of B4907 is “Y”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not effect unit 521 is at the initial position (B4908). (B4908 result is "Y"), the rendering unit 521 is moved to the rendering position located in front of the display device 41 (B4909).

  Next, effect control device 300 acquires the reserved icon information and the change suggestion advance notice information in reserved storage areas 360 and 370 of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 (B4910, B4911).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines the lighting mode of each effect unit 521 and movable effect member 44 based on the acquired hold icon display information and the change suggestion advance notice information (B4912), and performs each effect in the determined lighting mode. The unit 521 is turned on (B4913). For this reason, only the effect part 521 for which there is a hold memory emits light. In addition, the light emission mode of the effect unit 521 is turned on in the effect unit 521 corresponding to the hold storage without change suggestion advance notice information, and is turned on and off in the effect unit 521 corresponding to the hold storage with change suggestion advance information.

  Next, effect controller 300 determines whether or not the variable display game is being executed (B4914). If the variable display game is being executed (the result of B4914 is “Y”), the variable display game being executed is performed. It is determined whether or not is a pending storage for the notice (B4915).

  If the running variable display game is the holding memory for the notice (holding memory which is not the normal holding display) (result of B4915 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines that the running variable display game is It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is SP2 reach or more (B4916).

  When the running variable display game is equal to or more than the SP2 reach (the result of B4916 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the present time is the execution timing of the drop effect of the movable effect member 44. (B4917). The drop production may be at the start of fluctuation, at the time of SP reach development, the last scene of the reach production, or the like.

  If the current time is the execution timing of the drop effect (the result of B4917 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the drop effect of the movable effect member 44 (B4918), and ends this processing. The drop effect is an effect in which the movable effect member 44 is moved (dropped) in front of the display device 41 and then raised to the initial position. The movable effect member 44 may be brightened immediately before the fall.

  On the other hand, when the variable display game is not being executed (the result of B4914 is “N”), when the variable display game being executed is not the pending storage of the notice mode (the result of B4915 is “N”), If the display game is not equal to or greater than the SP2 reach (result of B4916 is "N"), and if the present time is not the timing of executing the drop effect (result of B4917 is "N"), the drop effect is not executed. The device 300 ends this processing.

[Transition diagram of screen etc.]
FIGS. 149A to 149C are transition diagrams of screens and the like for explaining the operation of the rendering unit 521 and the movable rendering member 44 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 149A (A) shows a state in which the variable display game is being executed in the first gaming state. At the initial position, effect unit 521 repeats lighting and blinking, for example, in units of two. Since the movable effect member 44 is in the first game state, it is waiting at the initial position. Four hold icons 83 are displayed in the hold icon display area 80b. In addition, in the specific effect area 81, a notice effect regarding the running variable display game is displayed.

  (B) shows a state in which the symbol of the running variable display game is determined to be the symbol that shifts to the second gaming state. In addition, a new prize is generated, the hold icon 83 in the blue mode with effect is displayed in the hold icon display area 80b, and the right end of the concealed shutter image 86 and the schedule icon 85 move to the left by one hold icon. ing.

  (C) represents a state in which the second game state transition effect for notifying (showing) transition to the second game state is being executed. In (C), the first gaming state remains, and “135”, which is the transition outcome to the second gaming state, is displayed small at the lower right of the screen and above the specific effect area 81.

  (D) of FIG. 149B shows a state in which the state has shifted to the second game state, and the rendering unit 521 has moved to the rendering position. Rendering unit 521 emits light as holding memory corresponding to storage 1 and storage 2 in order from rendering unit 521a in the upper left, and rendering unit 521e corresponding to storage 5 in the upper right emits light in a blinking blue mode. Here, the blinking of the effect part 521 in the second game state corresponds to, for example, an effect of the hold icon 83, and suggests that the display of the reliability changes after that.

  In the specific effect area 81, the pending memory that is currently executing the variable display game is displayed as “digestion”, and the number of the winning memory of the special figure 1 or the special memory 2 is displayed on the right side of the display of the digestion. I have. Further, in the specific effect area 81, the pending storage in which the variable display game has not been executed is displayed as “standby”, and the winning storage of the special figure 1 or the special drawing 2 is displayed on the right side of the standby display in the order of the pending storage to be executed. Is displayed in numbers.

  (E) shows a state in which the first variable display game has been executed after the transition to the second gaming state. Since the white hold storage has been executed, the movable effect member 44 is lit in a white mode. The movable effect member 44 in the second game state executes the light-emitting effect in a mode corresponding to the reliability of the held storage to be executed.

  (F) shows a state in which the symbols of the running variable display game are determined.

  (G) of FIG. 149C shows a state in which a new variable display game is executed, and the effecting unit 521c of HO3 changes to the red mode instead of the effecting unit 521d of HO4 that has been emitting light in a blinking blue mode. Represents.

  Thereafter, during the transition from (G) to (H), three prizes are generated and a new variable display game is started. Thereafter, one prize is generated and a new variable display game is started. After that, two winnings have occurred, and a new variable display game has been started.

  (H) shows a state in which the holding in the red mode is executed, the fluctuating symbol becomes the reach, and the drop effect of the movable effect member 44 is executed. The drop production may be at the start of fluctuation, at the time of SP reach development, the last scene of the reach production, or the like.

(Effect of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, whether the hold icon 83 displayed in the digestion hold display area 88 is the hold storage of the special figure 1 or the hold storage of the special figure 2 I can't tell. Therefore, the player can enjoy the variable display game without being aware of the special figure type of the variable display game being executed (that is, without being aware of the advantages and disadvantages of the big hit), and can improve the interest of the game. it can.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, both the reservation icon 83 of the special figure 1 and the reservation icon 83 of the special figure 2 are displayed by the common reservation icon 83, and the identification icon is displayed at a position corresponding to the reservation icon 83. 84 is displayed. For this reason, by making it possible to recognize the type of the pending storage that is on standby, it is possible to make the player foresee the progress of the game.

  According to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the special figure 1 identification icon 84a is displayed at the position corresponding to the reserved storage of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is displayed at the position corresponding to the reserved storage of the special figure 2. The identification icon 84b is displayed. Therefore, the player can immediately identify the type of the pending storage that is waiting.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a common event that can be generated from either of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and a common event that can be generated from either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, , A unique event (special figure 1 limited SP reach or special figure 2 limited SP reach) that does not occur from the event is set, and the hold notice mode differs for each event. Therefore, the difference due to the difference in the type can be made clearer, and the interest of the reservation notice is improved.

  In addition, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when the common event is generated, the suspension notice can be executed, but when the unique event is generated, the suspension notice is not executed. Therefore, the player cannot foresee the occurrence of the unique event, and the interest in the game when the unique event occurs can be improved.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a schedule icon 85 indicating a place where the next hold icon 83 is displayed is displayed in the hold icon display area 80b. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by letting the player know where the hold icon 83 is displayed next, and to entertain the player's eyes by moving the schedule icon 85 by increasing or decreasing the number of holds. it can. Further, when the number of reservations decreases (when the number of reservations becomes three or less), the space between the concealment shutter and the reservation icon 83 becomes two reservation icons. A state in which the left and right movements of the schedule icon 85 cooperate and a state in which the plan icon 85 does not cooperate are created, and the eyes of the player can be enjoyed.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, in the first game state, the effect unit (light emitting unit) 521 that waits at the initial position and executes the light emission effect as the decoration device, and the effect position in the second game state. To emit light as a display unit of the hold storage. Also, at the effect position, the effect units 521 emit light in a number corresponding to the number of holdings. Therefore, the player can intuitively know whether the player is in the first game state or the second game state depending on the position of the effect part 521, and a novel effect unprecedented can be provided.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when the rendering unit 521 is changed from the rendering position to the standby position, the light emission notice by the rendering unit 521 ends. Therefore, the state in which the effect part 521 is arranged at the effect position can be set to a state specialized for the light emission notice (a state in which the light emission notice is executed), and the playability is improved.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the moving range of the effect producing unit 521 does not overlap with the moving range of the movable effecting member 44. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the effect part 521 and the movable effect member 44 from interfering with each other, and to execute an effective effect.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a notice effect is executed in the specific effect area 81 in the first game state, and the execution storage and the waiting storage in the specific effect area 81 in the second game state are executed. The special map type is displayed. Therefore, for example, even when the execution period of the variable display game is short due to a reduction in time, the type of the hold storage can be quickly confirmed. Further, the player can enjoy the game while looking at only the hold icon 83 or enjoy the game while looking at the information displayed in the specific effect area 81, and can widen the range of the playability.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the concealed shutter image 86 is displayed in a predetermined empty area of the reserved icon display area 80b. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the free space in the state where the number of reservations is small is not conspicuous and gives the player a psychological burden that it is difficult to fill the free space. Further, since the concealment shutter image 86 moves right and left depending on the increase / decrease of the number of reservations, the eyes of the player can be enjoyed. Also, when the number of holdings decreases, the concealment shutter image 86 does not hide more than a certain holding icon (two holding icons), so that it is possible to give the player the impression that the number of holdings has decreased and the person has missed. . Therefore, the player can be motivated to improve the lonely situation of the hold icon display area 80b by increasing the number of holds (motivation to keep hitting positively).

  In addition, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the winning distribution mechanism 48 alternately places the game ball passing through the entrance opening 33c on the right side (on the side of the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36) by the load of the game ball. Distribute to the left side (Special figure 2 start winning opening 37d side). Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the entrance 33c alternately wins the special figure 1 starting winning port 36 and the special figure 2 starting winning port 37d. Further, since the right opening 33d and the left opening 33e are provided, even a game ball that has passed through the entrance 33c may jump out to the game area 32 outside the starting winning opening unit 33, and There are cases where the starting winning opening unit 33 jumps in from the outside through the opening 33d or the left opening 33e. In particular, at the time of right-handing, the game ball can win the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36 from the right opening 33d, so that the storage of the special figure 1 can be increased even during the right-handed electric support. At first glance, it seems that a prize is generated alternately in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and an irregular prize is generated, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Modification 1 of Fourth Embodiment]
In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the concealment shutter image 86 conceals the entire reserved icon display area 80b in the second game state. In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the identification icon 84 displays only the special figure 2 identification icon 84b.

  FIG. 150 is a view for explaining the display screen in the second game state of the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 151 is an enlarged view of the standby hold display area 80 and the digestion hold display area 88 in the first game state of the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In this modified example, when the second game state is entered, the concealed shutter image 86 obscures the entire reserved icon display area 80b. For this reason, the player's line of sight can be shifted from the reserved icon display area 80b to a peripheral portion centered on the display screen, and the player can enjoy the notice change by the staging section 521 and the movable staging member 44.

  Instead of the concealing shutter image 86 concealing the entirety of the reserved icon display area 80b, the display of the reserved icon display area 80b itself may disappear during the second game state. Further, the concealing shutter image 86 may also conceal the entire identification icon display area 80a so that the player cannot grasp the number of holdings.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 151 in an enlarged manner, only the special figure 2 identification icon 84b is displayed as the identification icon 84 regardless of the game state. Only the special figure 1 identification icon 84a may be displayed. Therefore, the control load of the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

  Since the special figure identification icon 84 is not displayed in the digestion suspension display area 88, the player does not make the player aware of the type of the special figure (whether storage of a disadvantageous round distribution or storage of a favorable round distribution). Can enjoy the variable display game.

(Effects of Modification Example 1 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, in the second game state, the concealment shutter image 86 occupies all the reserved icon display areas 80b. Therefore, it is possible to shift the line of sight of the player from the reserved icon display area 80b to a peripheral portion centered on the display screen, so that the player can enjoy the notice change by the staging section 521 and the movable staging member 44.

  According to the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, only the special figure 2 identification icon 84b is displayed as the identification icon 84 regardless of the game state. Therefore, the control load of the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

  Further, according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the special figure identification icon 84 is not displayed in the digestion suspension display area 88. Therefore, the player can enjoy the variable display game without making the player aware of the type of the special map.

[Modification 2 of Fourth Embodiment]
In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, even in the second game state, during the period in which the specific reach is being executed, each of the effect units 521 moves to the initial position.

[Transition diagram of screen etc.]
FIG. 152 is a transition diagram of a screen or the like for explaining the operation of the rendering unit 521 and the movable rendering member 44 in the second game state of the second modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 152A shows that a reach has occurred in the second gaming state. Here, there is a case where the reach is a normal reach and a case where the reach is a long reach.

  In the case of the normal reach, as shown in (B-1), the rendering unit 521 emits light at the rendering position, and also performs the rendering at the rendering position at (C-1) where the symbol is determined.

  On the other hand, when the reach is longer than the long reach (long reach, special 1-4 reach), as shown in (B-2), even in the second game state, the effect is produced immediately after the occurrence of the reach. The unit 521 moves from the presentation position to the initial position, and shifts from the hold display mode to the decoration light emission mode as the decoration device 46. In this case, the rendering unit 521 may be in the hold display mode as it is.

  Then, in the case of a loss, the state transits to (C-1), and in the case of a hit, the state transits to (C-2). In (C-2), the big hit is determined, and the effect part executes the light emission effect such as blinking all at once.

  After the determination of the big hit, as shown in (C-3), when the game shifts to the middle of the big hit (special game state), the rendering section 521 moves to the rendering position, and emits light as a hold display mode.

(Effect of Modification 2 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when a long reach occurs in the second game state, the effect unit 521 moves the effect position in front of the display device 41 from the effect position. Move to the side initial position. Therefore, the visibility of the display screen is improved, and the player can sufficiently recognize the reach effect. Also, in each of the effect units 521, decorative light emission is performed as a reach effect, so that the effect of the reach effect is improved.

  Further, according to the modified example 2 of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when long reach is determined by the big hit, rendering section 521 returns from the standby position to the rendering position. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure a state in which the light emission notice is executed. In addition, during the reach of the long reach or more, the directing section 521 is kept aside, and after the big hit is determined, the directing section 521 moves to the directing position, so that a special feeling of the big hit can be further produced.

[Modification 3 of Fourth Embodiment]
In the modified example 3 of the fourth embodiment, the rendering unit 521 moves to the rendering position during the pseudo-run variation, and functions as a countdown-type pseudo-pending in which the rendering unit 521 is turned off every time the pseudo-run variation progresses.

[Transition diagram of screen etc.]
FIG. 153 is a transition diagram of a screen or the like for explaining the operation of the display unit and the movable effect member 44 when the pseudo-run variation of the third modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention occurs.

  FIG. 153 (A) shows a state in which the first pseudo pseudo fluctuation starts. The rendering unit 521 emits light in the decorative light emission mode at the initial position until the pseudo-run variation starts.

  (B) shows a state in which the first time of the pseudo-run variation has been started and the rendering unit 521 has moved to the rendering position. Seven effect units 521 excluding the effect unit 521e at the lower right emit light in a white mode. The rendering unit 521 may move in conjunction with the screen rendering. The lower right effecting unit 521e is turned off to indicate that the first pseudo-run variation is being executed.

  (C) shows a state in which the second pseudo-run variation has started. Rendering unit 521f is turned off to indicate that the second pseudo-run variation is being executed.

  (D) shows a state in which the second pseudo consecutive change has progressed.

  (E) shows a state in which the third pseudo-run variation has started. Rendering section 521g is turned off to indicate that the third pseudo-run variation is being executed.

  (F) shows a state in which the third pseudo-run variation has progressed.

  (G) shows a state in which the fourth pseudo-run variation has started. Rendering unit 521h is turned off to indicate that the fourth pseudo-run variation is being executed.

  (H) shows a state in which the fourth pseudo consecutive change has progressed.

(Effect of Modification Example 3 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the third modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the production unit 521 moves from the initial position to the production position in accordance with the start of the pseudo-run variation, and the number of pseudo-run variations increases. The rendering unit 521 is turned off every time. As a result, the performance in the pseudo-run variation is improved, and the player can intuitively grasp what the variation is, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Modification 4 of Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, the effect unit 521 functions as a count-up type pseudo hold in which the staging unit 521 moves to the staging position every time the pseudo-run variation progresses.

[Transition diagram of screen etc.]
FIG. 154 is a transition diagram of a screen or the like for explaining the operation of the rendering unit 521 and the movable rendering member 44 when the pseudo-run variation of the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention occurs.

  FIG. 154 (A) shows a state in which the first pseudo consecutive fluctuation starts. The rendering unit 521 emits light in the decorative light emission mode at the initial position until the pseudo-run variation starts.

  (B) shows a state in which the first time of the pseudo-run variation has been started and the effect unit 521a on the upper left has moved to the effect position. The light emitting mode of the effect unit 521 that has moved to the effect position shifts from the decorative light emitting mode to the pseudo continuous light emitting mode.

  (C) shows a state in which the second pseudo-run variation has started.

  (D) shows a state in which the second pseudo consecutive change has progressed. The effect part 521b has moved to the effect position.

  (E) shows a state in which the third pseudo-run variation has started.

  (F) shows a state in which the third pseudo-run variation has progressed. The effect part 521c has moved to the effect position.

  (G) shows a state in which the fourth pseudo-run variation has started.

  (H) shows a state in which the fourth pseudo consecutive change has progressed.

(Effect of Modification Example 4 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the rendering unit 521 moves to the rendering position each time the number of times of the pseudo-run changes increases. As a result, the performance in the pseudo-run variation is improved, and the player can intuitively grasp what the variation is, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Modification 5 of Fourth Embodiment]
In the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment, the hold icon 83 changes due to the action of the advance notice character 73 that changes the display mode of the hold icon 83.

[Advance suggestion character]
FIG. 155 is a view for explaining a notice suggestion character 73 of Modification 5 of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 156 is a screen transition diagram illustrating a change in the hold icon 83 by the notice suggestion character 73 according to the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown as an example in FIG. 155, the notice suggestion character 73 of the present modification acts on the hold icon 83 in the white mode to change the light emission mode of the hold icon 83 in the white mode, and the hold icon 83 in the blue mode. Are prepared, a character B73d that changes the light emission mode of the blue-type hold icon 83 and a character C73e that changes the light-emitting mode of the red-type hold icon 83 by operating the red-type hold icon 83 are prepared.

  The notice suggestion character 73 can act on the waiting (undigested) holding icon 83 and the active (digesting) holding icon 83.

  In FIG. 156 (A), a white hold icon 83 is displayed in the digestion hold display area 88, and a white hold icon 83a with effect, white hold icons 83b to 83d, and a white light with effect are displayed in the hold icon display area 80b. A blue hold icon 83e is displayed. Since there are two hold icons 83 with effects, two notice suggestion icons appear thereafter.

  (B) shows a state in which the character A73c appears first, and then the character B73d appears, while one hold memory is digested and white with effect is being digested. Then, the character A73c acts on the pending icon 83 being executed to change to the blue mode. When there are a plurality of change icons 83 to be changed (including the hold icon 83 in the gaseous effect mode), the notice suggestion character 73 appears with a time difference and changes the hold icon 83.

  (C) shows a state in which the subsequent character B 73d has changed the blue hold icon 83d with effect to a red mode. In the case where a plurality of the effect-holding icons 83 of the same color are displayed, one notice suggestion character 73 can act on the effect-holding icon 83 of the same color to change the mode of the hold icon 83. .

(Effect of Modification Example 5 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the notice suggestion character 73 is not set according to the reliability as in the first embodiment, but is set. The setting is made in accordance with the mode of the hold icon 83. In addition, the notice suggestion character 73 acts (acts on) the hold icon 83 with an effect to change the hold icon 83. Therefore, the effect of the notice suggestion character 73 can entertain the eyes of the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the first to fourth embodiments, the hold icon 83 with the effect indicating the change of the hold icon 83 changes the notification mode of the reliability under the predetermined condition. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a hold change warp device 75 for causing a hold change is provided. The hold icon 83 changes based on the incoming ball.

(Game board)
FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The present embodiment is characterized in that a hold change warp device 75 and a passage gate 76 are provided in the center case 40.

  In the center case 40, a chance notification unit 77, a hold change warp device 75, a display device 41, a warp device 42 for guiding a game ball to the stage 43, and a stage 43 in which letters "MEMORY CHANCE" are drawn in order from the top are provided. Provided.

The hold change warp device 75 has, for example, an entrance (hold change warp inlet) 75a at the top of the center case 40, and the front half 75b of the passage is guided from the hold change warp inlet 75a to the upper right area of the display device 41. The rear half 75c of the passage is arranged from the upper right area of the display device 41 to the lower right area of the display device 41. A pass gate 76 is provided below the rear half 75c of the passage to detect a game ball that has entered the pending change warp device 75, and the game ball that has passed through the pass gate 76 becomes an out ball. Note that the pending change warp entrance 75a may be regarded as an out entrance.

  Each of the chance notification unit 77 and the passage gate 76 has an LED (not shown) inside and can emit light.

  A set of obstacle nails 32a is disposed immediately above the pending change warp entrance 75a and on the left and right of the game area 32 outside the center case 40. One set of obstacle nails 32a is arranged with a width that allows a game ball to pass through.

  Other arrangements and configurations of the game area 32 outside the center case 40 are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, in this embodiment as well, the special distribution shown in FIG. 2 is a distribution that is more advantageous for the player in the round distribution at the time of the big hit.

[Pending change production process]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hold change effect processing according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.

  Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current number of holds is the upper limit (B5001). The upper limit is set to, for example, 8.

  Only when the current number of suspensions is not the upper limit value (result of B5001 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not specific reach (SP reach) is being executed (B5002). If the specific reach is not being executed (result of B5002 is “N”), effect control device 300 turns off chance notification unit 77 and passing gate 76 (B5003), and ends this processing.

  If the current number of holds is the upper limit (result of B5001 is “Y”), or if the specific reach is being executed even if the number of holds is not the upper limit (the result of B5002 is “Y”). The effect control device 300 causes the chance notifying unit 77 and the passage gate 76 to emit light (B5004).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through passage gate 76 (B5005). If it has not passed (the result of B5005 is "N"), this processing ends.

  If the vehicle has passed (the result of B5005 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 outputs a passing sound (B5006), and frames out the hold icon 83 displayed in the standby hold display area 80 (B5007). .

  Next, effect control device 300 acquires the final holding icon information from standby holding storage areas 363 to 366 (B5008), and determines holding icon 83 according to the final holding icon information (B5009).

  Next, effect control device 300 frames determined holding icon 83 into standby holding display area 80 (B5010), and ends this processing.

As described above, when the number of reserves reaches the upper limit of eight, or when the SP reach is executed, the passing gate 76 is enabled, and when there is a ball in the pending change warp device 75, the pending icon 83 is displayed. Changes occur.

  If the game icon has already passed through the passage gate 76 when the reservation icon 83 has already changed, the rank of the reservation icon 83 may be increased to further increase the reliability of the notice.

[Change of hold icon]
159A and 159B are front views of the inside of the center case 40 for explaining a change of the hold icon 83 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 159A shows a state where the passage gate 76 is not activated. (B) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the pass gate 76 is activated, (C) is a diagram illustrating a state in which a game ball has passed through the pass gate 76 in an effective state, and (D) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the hold icon 83 has changed.

  FIG. 159A (A) shows a state in which the number of reservations is seven and the passage gate 76 is not enabled. The chance notification unit 77 and the passing gate 76 are turned off, and the holding icon 83 does not change even if the ball enters the holding change warp device 75.

  (B) shows a state in which the number of reservations is eight and the passage gate 76 is activated. When the passage gate 76 is activated, the chance notification unit 77 and the passage gate 76 emit light to notify the activation. The bulb channels 75b and 75c may also emit light as a notification of the activation.

  (C) shows a state in which the game ball passes through the passage gate 76, and the hold icon 83 temporarily frames out of the hold icon display area 80b. When the game ball passes through the activated passage gate 76, a passing sound is output.

  (D) shows a state in which the display mode of the hold icon 83 has changed and the frame has entered the hold icon display area 80b. Since the game ball has passed through the passage gate 76, the chance notification unit 77 and the passage gate 76 are turned off. Note that the hold icon 83 of the hold memory being executed may also change its display mode by frame-out and frame-in.

(Effect of Fifth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the pass gate 76 is activated when the number of reserves reaches the upper limit or when the SP reach is executed, and when the game ball passes through the pass gate 76, the change target is changed. Are simultaneously changed. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented performance with an exhilarating feeling, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the activated passage gate 76, all the holding icons 83 are simultaneously framed out and then framed in with the changed display mode, so that a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using gaming balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combinations.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 11 body frame 12 front frame (game frame)
13 Projection production unit 15 Glass frame 19 Speaker 24 Operation handle 25 Production button 30 Game board 32 Game area 34 Ordinary design start gate (General figure start gate)
35 General winning opening 36 Starting winning opening (first starting winning area)
37 Ordinary fluctuation winning device 37b Movable member (movable piece)
38 First Special Variable Winning Device 39 Second Special Variable Winning Device 40 Center Case 41 Display Device 44 Board Direction Device (Movable Direction Member, Movable Member)
46 Decoration equipment (decoration members)
48 Winning distribution mechanism 50 Batch display (LED)
Reference Signs List 61 magnetic sensor switch 62 radio wave sensor 63 glass frame open detection switch 64 front frame open detection switch 71 external information terminal 73 advance notice character 74 advance notice character 75 hold change warp device 76 passing gate 77 chance notification section 79 fluctuation display area 80 standby hold display Area 80a Identification icon display area 80b Reservation icon display area 81 Specific effect area 83 Reservation icon 84 Identification icon 85 Schedule icon 86 Concealed shutter image 87 Mode display section 88 Digestion suspension display area 89a Special figure 1 reservation number display section 89b Special figure 2 reservation Number display unit 91 Payout motor 100 Game control device (main board)
Reference Signs List 200 payout control device 300 effect control device 400 power supply device 500 hold display unit case 501 base member 502 shielding wall (shielding portion)
503 Translucent lens unit 510 Hold display unit (second display unit)
511 Hold display section (mechanical hold memory)
512 Petals (movable members)
513 Hold indicator LED (hold lamp)
514 Box part 515 Door (movable member)
516 Operation suggestion light-emitting part 520 Unit base 521 Directing part

Claims (2)

A variable display game in which identification information is changed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting port, and a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Gaming machines,
Effect control means that can control the effect of the gaming machine,
Start-up storage means capable of storing a start-up memory as a right to execute the variable display game based on a winning of a game ball to the start-up opening,
The starting port includes a first starting port and a second starting port,
The start storage means,
A first start memory, which is an execution right of the variable display game, is stored based on a winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the variable display game is stored based on a winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Memorizing a second starting memory which is an execution right,
The effect control means,
E Bei the start memory display means capable of displaying the start memory as the start memory display,
The start storage display means,
Based on the variable display game results state, and are capable of different specific display position and the predetermined display position the display position of the starting memory display from a predetermined display position,
In the predetermined display position, the first start memory is displayed,
The gaming machine, wherein the second start memory is displayed and the first start memory is not displayed at the specific display position . A variable display game in which identification information is changed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting port, and a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Gaming machines,
Effect control means that can control the effect of the gaming machine,
Starting storage means capable of storing a starting memory that is an execution right of the variable display game, based on a winning of a game ball to the starting port,
Based on the fact that the result of the variable display game has become the special result in the normal game state, a specific game state in which the special game state is more likely to occur than the normal game state can be generated after the special game state has occurred. Specific game state generating means,
The starting port includes a first starting port and a second starting port,
The start storage means,
A first start memory, which is an execution right of the variable display game, is stored based on a winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the variable display game is stored based on a winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Memorizing a second starting memory which is an execution right,
The effect control means,
Start-up storage display means capable of displaying the start-up memory as a start-up storage display,
The start storage display means,
Displaying the first start memory at a predetermined display position in the normal game state;
A gaming machine wherein the second start memory is displayed at a specific display position different from the predetermined display position in the specific game state, and the first start memory is not displayed .

Images